JP6816804B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

A gaming machine has been proposed in which a player is provided with a button that can be operated, and the player operates the button to display a notice effect such as a character on a display device. In such a game machine, when the operating means is operated, the valid period on which the notice effect or the like is displayed is displayed to the player on the display device or the like.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-350846

However, improvement in the interest of further game that has been required.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a first control means for executing game control and a second control for executing game control based on a control signal from the first control means. The means, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a display means that can display the effect mode are provided, and the effect mode is displayed on the display means based on the operation of the operation means during the valid period. A display control means that can be displayed on the screen, a validity period setting means that can set the validity period, an operating means that can operate at least in the first state and a second state different from the first state, and the above. The display control means has an operation control means capable of operating the operation means from the first state to the second state, and the display control means uses the display means as a remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the valid period. It is configured so that it can be displayed, and a plurality of suggested modes can be dynamically displayed at different positions outside the valid period, and the plurality of suggested modes can be displayed at a position where the plurality of suggested modes overlap during the valid period. The operation control means operates the operating means from the second state to the first state before a predetermined period from the start of the valid period, and based on the start of the valid period, the first state to the second state. The display control means dynamically displays the plurality of suggested modes so as to approach each other when the operating means is operated from the second state to the first state. Then, when the operating means is operated from the first state to the second state, the display means can display the plurality of suggested modes in a manner overlapping with each other .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1 , the first control means for executing the control of the game, the second control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the first control means, and the player. Has an operation means that can be operated and a display means that can display the effect mode, and the display means can display the effect mode based on the operation of the operation means during the valid period. A possible display control means, a valid period setting means capable of setting the valid period, an operating means capable of operating at least in the first state and a second state different from the first state, and the operating means being described as the first. It has an operation control means capable of operating from one state to the second state, and the display control means can cause the display means to display a remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the valid period. The operation control means is configured to be able to dynamically display a plurality of suggestion modes at different positions outside the valid period and display the plurality of suggestive modes at overlapping positions during the valid period. The operating means is operated from the second state to the first state before a predetermined period from the start of the valid period, and is operated from the first state to the second state based on the start of the valid period. The display control means dynamically displays the plurality of suggested modes so as to approach each other when the operating means is operated from the second state to the first state, and the operating means. Is operated from the first state to the second state, the display means can display the plurality of suggested modes in a manner overlapping with each other. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of the operation unit. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the composite operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a pair of slide members, a back cover, a 1st gear group and a 2nd gear group. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a pair of slide members, a back cover, a 1st gear group and a 2nd gear group. It is a front perspective view of a half moon member. It is a rear perspective view of a half moon member. It is a partial front view of a compound operation unit. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit on the line XVIIa-XVIIa of FIG. 16, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit after moving the drive device from (a). It is a partial front view of a compound operation unit. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit in the XIXa-XIXa line of FIG. 18, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit after the drive motor is separated from the drive gear from (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the two-layer gear, and (b) is a rear view of the two-layer gear. (A) is a rear view of the composite operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a double-layer gear and a reversing gear. (A) is a rear view of the composite operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a double-layer gear and a reversing gear. (A) and (b) are rear views of the two-layer gear and the reversing gear. (A) is a rear view of the composite operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a double-layer gear and a reversing gear. (A) is a rear view of the composite operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a double-layer gear and a reversing gear. (A) and (b) are partial rear views of the composite operation unit. It is a front view of the pair of slide members in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a pair of slide members. (A) is a front view of the two-layer gear in the third embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of the two-layer gear, and (c) is a side view of the two-layer gear. (A) is a front view of the reversing gear, (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear, and (c) is a side view of the reversing gear. (A) is a front view of the two-layer gear according to the fourth embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of the two-layer gear, and (c) is a second view on the XXXIc-XXXIc line of FIG. 31 (b). It is sectional drawing of the layer gear. (A) is a front view of the reversing gear, (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear, and (c) is a partial side view of the reversing gear in the direction of arrow XXXIIc of FIG. 32 (a). .. It is a front view of the two-layer gear in the fifth embodiment. It is a partial front view of the 2nd gear group. It is a partial front view of the 2nd gear group. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the two-layer gear in the sixth embodiment. It is a front view of a two-layer gear and a reversing gear. (A) to (c) are rear views of the two-layer gear in the seventh embodiment. (A) to (e) are rear views of the two-layer gear and the reversing gear. (A) and (b) are front views of the composite operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the composite operation unit. (A) to (e) are rear views of the two-layer gear and the reversing gear. (A) and (b) are front views of the composite operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the composite operation unit. It is a graph which shows the speed change of a two-layer gear. (A) and (b) are rear views of the two-layer gear in the eighth embodiment. (A) to (e) are rear views of the two-layer gear and the reversing gear. It is a graph which shows the rotation speed of a two-layer gear. (A) is a front perspective view of the specific winning opening 650, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the specific winning opening 650. It is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled specific winning opening 650. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the disassembled specific winning opening 650. (A) is a front view with the front cover of the specific winning device 650 removed, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LIIb-LIIB of FIG. 52 (a), and FIG. 52 (c) is a sectional view of FIG. 52 (a). ) Is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LIIc-LIIc. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the actual display screen in the first control example. is there. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the ball entry timing in the opening / closing operation of the ball entry regulation plate. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ball entry timing in the opening / closing pattern A of the ball entry control plate, and (b) is a schematic view of the ball entry timing in the opening / closing pattern B of the ball entry control plate. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detection timing of various sensors and the content of the effect display based on the detection result. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the appearance effect by the normal effect screen during the jackpot game in the first control example, and (b) is the appearance by the special effect screen during the jackpot game in the first control example. It is the figure which showed typically the production and the escape production. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a capture effect and an escape effect by the special effect screen during the jackpot game in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the special effect during the jackpot game in the first control example. It is the figure which showed typically the appearance effect and the recapturing effect by a screen. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an appearance effect and a failure effect by the special effect screen during the big hit game in the first control example, and (b) is a normal effect during the big hit game in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the capture effect by a screen. (A) and (b) are schematic views schematically showing a spherical accessory and a display content in the accessory interlocking effect. (A) and (b) are schematic views schematically showing a spherical accessory and a display content in the accessory interlocking effect. (A) and (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents in the background interlocking effect. (A) and (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents in the background interlocking effect. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the first control example. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit random number counter C1 in the first control example and the jackpot determination value of the special symbol, and (b) is the first diagram in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type, and (c) is the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 in the first embodiment and the hit determination value of the ordinary symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the first control example, and (b) is the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of a big hit in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship schematically, and (c) is the schematic diagram which schematically showed the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of disconnection (normal) in the first control example. (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type at the time of deviation (probability change) in the first control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a block diagram which shows. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory interlocking effect table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the background lottery table in the first control example. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the work RAM in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on in the 1st control example. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A in the first control example, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table in the 1st control example schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table in the 1st control example schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the drawing list in the 1st control example schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the background change extraction processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot winning process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the big hit middle effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ball entry effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the appearance effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the escape effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the failure effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the capture effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the recapturing effect processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the timing notification processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the backside change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the SW effect of the comment system effect in the second control example. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the SW effect of the continuous striking system effect in the second control example. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the SW effect of the touch system effect in the second control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is a block diagram which shows. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit normal reach comment background table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the contents of the hit super reach comment background table in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in the above. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment background table at the time of loss in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fixed comment background table at the time of loss in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram shown, and FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit-time fixed comment background table in the second control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment table in the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous hitting system production lottery table in the second control example. Is. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 2nd control example. (A) and (b) are schematic views schematically showing an example of the effect screen of the continuous striking system effect in the third control example. (A) and (b) are schematic views schematically showing an example of the effect screen of the continuous striking system effect in the third control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 in the voice lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) shows the contents of RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first lottery table in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the second lottery table in the third control example schematically. FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third lottery table in the third control example, and FIG. 3D is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fourth lottery table in the third control example schematically. (E) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the fifth lottery table in the third control example, and (f) is a schematic view of the sixth lottery table in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first remaining time lottery table in the third control example, and (b) shows the contents of the second remaining time lottery table in the third control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, and FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the third remaining time lottery table in the third control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the SW pressing adaptation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect selection process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ball entry timing in the opening / closing pattern at the time of big hit C in the fourth control example, and (b) is the opening / closing pattern at the time of small hit in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the ball entry timing. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the inter-round processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 26, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, in the game board 13, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance and a windmill (movable member 310 are shown, and others are shown) on a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view. In addition to the rails 61 and 62 (not shown), the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), the through gate 67. , The variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole, and is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined force or more hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 16R probability variation jackpot and 16R time saving jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "16R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 16 rounds, and the "15R time saving jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds. Later, it is a big hit that shifts to a low probability state and becomes a time saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and has a third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" ”Is easy to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

As a result, in many cases, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory is reached. A ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning a prize in the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and a big hit is made. It is advantageous for the player to aim to become.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

It should be noted that the selection ratio of the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot may be different depending on whether the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 or the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. .. Specifically, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is determined when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 and in the case where the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. Set higher than. This makes it possible to clarify the above-mentioned change due to the way the ball is hit.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a front-view triangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (shown) for driving the opening / closing to the right with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the right, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state. It operates so as to repeat the state of.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. The first ball-entry sensor 650a and the second ball-entry sensor 650b, which are arranged in the specific winning unit 650, are connected, and the MPU 201 is output from signals output from various switches 208 and from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, a first accessory motor 330c, a second accessory motor 340c, and an inlet. A sensor 651a, an exit sensor 652a, a detour sensor 653a, and the like are connected to each other. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 472.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 26. First, the accommodation structure of the units 300 and 400 in the rear case 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 when the disassembled operation unit 200 is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 7 shows a state in which the combined operation unit 400 is mounted on the rear case 210.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, one side (front side of the paper in FIG. 6) of the operation unit 200 is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The back case 210 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

In the operation unit 200, the front unit 300 and the combined operation unit 400 are respectively housed in the internal space of the rear case 210, and these are configured as one unit.

Specifically, the composite operation unit 400 is formed with an outer shape slightly smaller than the shape formed by the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210, and is surrounded by the outer wall portion 212 while abutting on the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212. It is arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 in such an manner (see FIG. 7). In the assembled state (see FIG. 5), the composite operation unit 400 has a rectangular opening formed at a position corresponding to the opening 211a of the rear case 210 when viewed from the front.

In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the front unit 300 is arranged on the front side of the composite operation unit 400 in a laminated state, and is housed in the back case 210 (see FIG. 5).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the other operating units (for example, the front unit 300) are arranged in a laminated state in which the other operating units (for example, the front unit 300) are overlapped on the front side with respect to the predetermined operating unit (for example, the composite operating unit 400). In front view, a predetermined operating unit can be shielded by another operating unit.

In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light-transmitting material and the operation unit arranged on the back side of the game board 13 is visible to the player, a predetermined operation unit. Only the necessary part of the above can be made visible to the player, and the other part can be shielded from the player by another operation unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the entire member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. ..

Next, the outline of the operation mode of the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. In the description of FIG. 8, FIGS. 5 to 7 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 8 is a front view of the operating unit 200. Note that FIG. 8 shows a state in which the pair of slide members 420 of the composite operation unit 400 are arranged at the overhanging positions.

At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the pair of slide members 420 of the composite operation unit 400 are retracted above and below the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of slide members 420 are slid and moved in directions facing each other, and the pair of slide members 420 are moved to the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the third symbol display device 81. It is placed on the front (see FIG. 2).

Since each of these operation units 300 and 400 is formed so as to be able to operate independently and is arranged in a stacked (stacked) state as described above, among the respective operation units 300 and 400. With respect to those arranged in different layers, even if the operating member projects inward of the opening 211a of the back case 210, it can be operated at the same time. That is, not only can each of the operation units 300 and 400 be operated independently, but these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the composite operation unit 400, the retracted position and the overhanging position of the pair of slide members 420 are formed as the end of the movable range of the pair of slide members 420.

Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 24. 9 (a) and 9 (b) are front perspective views of the combined operation unit 400. Note that FIG. 9A shows a state in which the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 9B shows a state in which the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 are arranged in the overhanging position. .. The overhanging positions of the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 are formed as terminals located on the opposite side of the above-mentioned retracted position among the ends of the movable range of the slide member 420.

As shown in FIG. 9, the pair of slide members 420 of the composite operation unit 400 are slid in the vertical direction, and in the process of the slide movement, the half moon member 460 is 421 a of the shaft support hole 421a of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 12). Is rotated around. Next, the overall configuration of the composite operation unit 400 will be described.

10 is an exploded front perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. 12 is a pair of slide members 420, a back cover 430, and a first gear group. FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the 440 and the second gear group 450, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the pair of slide members 420, the back cover 430, the first gear group 440, and the second gear group 450.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the composite operation units 400 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, and are connected to a pair of base members 410 that are fastened and fixed to the rear case 210, and the base members 410 are connected and vertically. A pair of slide members 420 that are slidably movable, a back cover 430 that forms a space between the slide members 420 and the main body 421 of the slide members 420, and a slide member. The first gear group 440 arranged between the 420 and the back cover 430, the second gear group 450 also arranged between the slide member 420 and the back cover 430, and the reversal of the second gear group 450. It is mainly composed of a half-moon member 460 locked to the gear 453 and a driving device 470 for generating a driving force for moving the slide member 420.

The base member 410 is a member that is formed in the shape of a long rectangular plate in the vertical direction and serves as a skeleton of the composite operation unit 400, and has a long plate-shaped main body portion 411 that matches the thickness direction with the front-rear direction. Assembled with a plurality of slide holes 412 formed in the thickness direction and extending in the vertical direction, and an alignment wall 413 formed on opposite surfaces of a pair of base members 410 as a wall surface parallel to the extension direction of the slide holes 412. A fixed rack gear member 414 in which rack gears 414a and 414b are formed on a side surface opposite to the side surface abutting on the alignment wall 413 in the state (see FIG. 9) is provided.

The slide hole 412 is an elongated hole that regulates the slide direction of the slide member 420, and is a pair of intermediate slide holes 412a that are connected to substantially the center of each base member 410 and have the same extension direction, and an intermediate portion thereof. Formed on the outer side of the slide hole 412a (opposite side of the pair of base members 410) and on the inner side of the intermediate slide hole 412a (opposite side of the pair of base members 410). It is provided with an inward slide hole 412c to be formed. The outer slide holes 412b and the inner slide holes 412c are formed alternately in the upper and lower directions. That is, for example, when the outer slide hole 412b is formed in the upper part of the base member 410, the inner slide hole 412c is formed in the lower part of the base member 410.

The fixed rack gear member 414 is fastened to the base member 410 in a state of being in contact with the alignment wall 413 for the purpose of transmitting a driving force to the first gear group 440 and the second gear group 450, and has a rod shape having a rectangular cross section. Permanent rack gear 414a, which is a member to be formed and is engraved over an outer surface which is a side surface abutting on the alignment wall 413 and a surface opposite to the outer surface formed parallel to the outer surface. A limited rack gear 414b, which is a rack gear engraved adjacent to the front side (front side in FIG. 10) of the permanent rack gear 414a and is engraved only in the vicinity of the central portion of the base member 410, is mainly provided.

The permanent rack gear 414a is meshed with the second gear group 450, and the limited rack gear 414b is meshed with the first gear group 440, but the details will be described later. Further, in the limited rack gear 414b, the starting gear teeth 414b1 (end gear teeth) arranged on the side where the irregular gear 441 of the first gear group 440 starts to mesh with each other are formed larger than the other gear teeth. (See FIG. 10).

The slide member 420 is a member in which the half moon member 460 is arranged in the central portion and slides up and down. Since the slide members 420 are formed in pairs from the top and bottom and the configurations of the slide members 420 are common (point symmetry at the center point in the front view), only one (upper) slide member 420 will be described, and the other (lower) will be described. The description of the slide member 420 will be omitted.

That is, one of the slide members 420 has a main body portion 421 formed in the shape of a long rectangular plate in the left-right direction and a step formed on both ends toward the front side, and vertically downward from both ends of the main body portion 421. A pair of extended leg portions 422 to be transmitted, a pair of side wall portions 423 extending plate-like from both upper and lower ends of the main body portion 421 to the back side (front side in FIG. 11), and a protrusion from the back surface of the main body portion 421. The first shaft support pin 424, which is provided and a plurality of them are continuously provided in the left-right direction, and the second shaft support pin 425, which is provided so as to project from the back surface of one end (right side of FIG. 11) of the main body 421. And mainly prepare.

The main body portion 421 is arranged so as to face the large-diameter shaft support hole 421a drilled in the central portion, the rotation control hole 421b drilled in an arc shape coaxial with the shaft support hole 421a, and the side wall portion 423 at the upper end. It is mainly composed of a slide regulation wall portion 421c whose central side is one step closer to the side wall portion 423, and a slide regulation pin 421d which is projected toward the back side at both ends and is formed as a pair of upper and lower parts. To.

The shaft support hole 421a is an opening through which the arc-shaped wall portion 461c of the half-moon member 460 is inserted, and the diameter of the shaft support hole 421a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the arc-shaped wall portion 461c. Through this shaft support hole 421a, the half moon member 460 and the reversing gear 453 are connected so as not to rotate relative to each other.

The rotation control hole 421b is an opening through which the locking pin 461e of the half-moon member 460 is inserted, and the width of the rotation control hole 421b is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the locking pin 461e. Further rotation of the half-moon member 460 is restricted by abutting the locking pin 461e on the end of the rotation restricting hole 421b.

The slide regulation wall portion 421c is a portion for accommodating the slide rack 442 of the first gear group 440 between the slide regulation wall portion 421c and the upper side wall portion 423 of the main body portion 421, and a portion formed in a step is an urging force on the slide rack 442. It is formed in a manner of damming one end of the urging spring 442c.

The slide regulation pin 421d is a tubular member that is inserted into the ring-shaped collar member C and is inserted into the intermediate slide hole 412a of the base member 410, and the retaining plate B is fastened and fixed at the tip.

The collar member C (see FIG. 17A) is formed in a ring shape having a flange (large diameter portion). The outer diameter of the flange is formed to be larger than the width of each slide hole 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a, and the outer diameter of the ring portion on which the flange is formed is the outer diameter of each slide hole 412a to 412c including the intermediate slide hole 412a. It is formed slightly smaller than the width of. Therefore, the flange is interposed between the main body 421 of the slide member 420 and the main body 411 of the base member 410, and the ring portion of the collar member C is accommodated in the intermediate slide hole 412a with a slight gap. As a result, the slide regulation pin 421d is formed so as to be freely movable in the extension direction of the intermediate slide hole 412a, while the movement of the intermediate slide hole 412a in the direction orthogonal to the extension direction is restricted.

The retaining plate B (see FIG. 19A) is formed with a width larger than the width of each of the slide holes 412a to 412c whose main body portion includes the intermediate slide holes 412a. Therefore, the slide member 420 is non-pullably connected to the base member 410 in a state where the retaining plate B is fastened to the slide regulation pin 421d.

Further, the retaining plate B is provided with a fastening hole on the surface abutting the end portion of the slide regulation pin 421d, and the circumference of the fastening hole is built up in the same shape as the ring portion of the collar member C. The built-up portion is housed in the intermediate slide hole 412a. As a result, the collar member C is disposed at the root portion of the slide regulation pin 421d, and the build-up portion of the retaining plate B is disposed at the tip portion. Therefore, the shaft of the slide regulation pin 421d is provided with an intermediate slide hole. It can be stably supported while matching the opening directions of the slide holes 412a to 412c including the 412a (see FIG. 19A).

The transmitted leg portion 422 is a portion to which the driving force of the driving device 470 is transmitted, and has the same embodiment as the rack gear 422a meshed with the driving gear 473 of the driving device 470 and the slide restricting pin 421d of the main body portion 421. It is formed on the sliding regulation pin 422b that is projected, the front side wall portion 422c that is overlaid on the front tooth width direction (direction perpendicular to the continuous direction of the gear teeth) side surface of the rack gear 422a, and the front side wall portion 422c thereof. It mainly includes a notch portion 422d which is an arc-shaped notch.

Similar to the slide regulation pin 421d, the slide regulation pin 422b is provided with the collar member C and the retaining plate B, and is inserted into the slide holes 412b and 412c of the base member 410. In the present embodiment, the slide regulation pin 422b of the transmitted leg portion 422 on the right side of the front view is inserted into the outer slide hole 412c of the base member 410, and the slide regulation pin 422 of the transmitted leg portion 422 on the left side of the front view is inserted. 422b is inserted into the inward slide hole 412c of the base member 410. As a result, in a state where the retaining plate B is fastened to the slide regulation pin 422b, the axis of the slide regulation pin 422b is stably supported while being aligned with the opening directions of the slide holes 412b and 412c, and the slide member 420 and the base. The member 410 can be connected without being pulled out.

The front side wall portion 422c is formed in such a manner that it can overlap with the gear teeth of the drive gear 473 in the front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 18).

In the cutout portion 422d, when the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 9A), the representative circle slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the drive gear 473 is the rotation axis and the central axis of the drive gear. When they are arranged together, the representative circle is formed in a portion projected on the front side wall portion 422c in the front view.

The side wall portion 423 includes a notch portion 423a that is cut out above and below the region where the shaft support hole 421a of the main body portion 421 is formed. The cutout portion 423a serves as a portion through which the drive lever 467 of the half-moon member 460 passes.

The first shaft support pin 424 includes a raised shaft support pin 424a in which a plurality of (three locations in the present embodiment) are continuously provided from the back surface of the slide member 420, and a two-layer gear adjacent to the shaft support hole 421a of the slide member 420. Mainly includes a shaft support pin 424b.

Since the raised shaft support pin 424a is provided with a ring-shaped portion having the same height around it, the second gear group 450 to be inserted is raised from the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420 (a predetermined distance from the main body portion 421). Axial support. As a result, the first gear group 440 can be arranged in the space.

The back cover 430 is a member that covers the main body portion 421 and the pair of side wall portions 423 of the slide member 420 by being fastened and fixed to the back surface of the slide member 420, and is a pair of insertion through which the slide regulation pin 421d is inserted. Holes 430a are drilled at one end of each.

The first gear group 440 is a group of gears housed between the slide member 420 and the back cover 430 and meshed with the limited rack gear 414b, and has a deformed gear 441 meshed with the limited rack gear 414b and a side surface. A slide rack 442 on which the rack gear 442b is engraved and slid along the slide regulation wall portion 421c of the slide member 420, a pair of transmission gears 443 that transmit the rotation of the deformed gear 441 to the slide rack 442, and a deformed gear. Of the 441 and the pair of transmission gears 443, a plate-shaped member that covers the transmission gear 443 arranged on the deformed gear 441 side from the axial direction, and an intermediate plate 444 that is fastened and fixed to the main body 421 of the slide member 420. , Is mainly provided.

The modified gear 441 includes a starting gear tooth 441a that is formed to be larger than the other teeth among the gear teeth to be engraved.

The modified gear 441 and the pair of transmission gears 443 are pivotally supported by a plurality of second shaft support pins 425 of the slide member 420, respectively.

The slide rack 442 is provided from the side surface of the main body portion 442a formed in a rectangular rod shape, the rack gear 442b formed on one side surface of the main body portion 442a and meshed with the transmission gear 443, and the main body portion 442a. It mainly includes an urging spring 442c that is locked to the protruding portion.

The urging spring 442c is locked to the step portion of the slide restricting wall portion 421c of the slide member 420 to generate an urging force that pushes the slide rack 442 back toward the transmission gear 443.

The intermediate plate 444 is a plate that divides the first gear group 440 and the second gear group 450 into front and rear, and a shaft support pin 444a is projected toward the front side.

Of the plurality of gears of the second gear group 450, the transmission gear 451 meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 is pivotally supported by the shaft support pin 444a.

The second gear group 450 has a role of reversing the half-moon member 460 by rotating the reversing gear 453 by utilizing the vertical displacement of the slide member 420, and a plurality of the second gear group 450 in the left-right direction (four in the present embodiment). ) Are connected and the outer end gear is meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410, and the inner end portion of the plurality of transmission gears 451 on the opposite side of the permanent rack gear 414a. The two-layer gear 452, in which the gear teeth 452a of the upper layer (rear layer) are meshed with the transmission gear 451 axially supported by the two-layer gear 452, and the dividing gear teeth 452b of the lower layer (front layer) of the two-layer gear 452. It mainly includes a reversing gear 453 to be meshed with each other.

Of the plurality of gears, the transmission gear 451 is provided with the gear at the end of the base member 410 on the permanent rack gear 414a side being pivotally supported by the shaft support pin 444a of the first gear group 440, and the other gears are the raised shaft support of the slide member 420. It is pivotally supported by pin 424a.

As described above, since the raised shaft support pin 424a is provided with a ring-shaped portion having the same height around it, the transmission gear 451 is raised from the main body portion 421 of the slide member 420 (a predetermined distance from the main body portion 421). Axial support. As a result, the axial heights of the transmission gear 451 pivotally supported by the shaft support pin 444a of the first gear group 440 and the other transmission gears 451 can be made to match. That is, the plurality of transmission gears 451 are pivotally supported by each other with a predetermined distance from the main body 421 of the slide member 420.

The two-layer gear 452 is formed of a resin material and has gear teeth 452a engraved on the upper layer (layer on the back side), dividing gear teeth 452b engraved on the lower layer (layer on the front side), and upper and lower layers. Mainly includes a disk portion 452c formed between the two, and a sliding wall portion 452d which is an arc-shaped wall surface slid on the arc-shaped recess 453c of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 20).

Since the gear teeth 452a are always meshed with the transmission gear 451, the two-layer gear 452 is constantly rotated when the slide member 420 slides up and down.

The lower layer of the two-layer gear 452 is composed of a region in which the dividing gear tooth 452b is engraved and a region in which the sliding wall portion 452d is formed, and is in the middle of the boundary between the dividing gear tooth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d. A starting gear tooth 452b1 larger than the gear tooth 452b2 is engraved. The recesses 452b3 and 452b4 (see FIG. 20) formed on both sides of the starting gear teeth 452b1 as receiving portions of the gear teeth are formed deeper than the recesses between the gear teeth of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. As a result, the starting gear teeth 453b1 formed to be larger than the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 453, which will be described later, can be accepted in good meshing (a state in which the gear teeth are deeply meshed). Therefore, even if the size of the gear teeth is different for each tooth, the tooth engagement relationship between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 can be kept good.

The recesses 452b3 and 452b4 formed on both sides of the starting gear teeth 452b1 serve as receiving portions of the starting gear teeth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23B). Of the recessed portions 452b3 and 452b4, the side close to the sliding wall portion 452d is referred to as the first recessed portion 452b3, and the opposite side of the first recessed portion 452b3 is referred to as the second recessed portion 452b4.

The gear tooth 452b is formed smaller than the starting gear tooth 452b1 of the dividing gear tooth 452b and larger than the intermediate gear tooth 452b2. As a result, as will be described later, the misalignment between the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the starting gear teeth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 at the start of meshing is suppressed, and the accuracy of rotation during continuous meshing is improved. Can be made to.

The start of meshing means the time when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 start to come into contact with each other, and is not limited to the case where the gear teeth start to come into contact with each other. In the present embodiment, it means that the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 are in contact with each other.

Further, the continuous meshing means a state in which the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 and 453b2 are meshed after the starting gear teeth 452b1 and 453b1 are meshed.

As a method of enlarging the starting gear tooth 452b1, a method of enlarging the tooth width (the length along the axial direction of the gear) can be considered. However, in the present embodiment, the tooth widths of the starting gear teeth 452b1 and the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed to be the same because the two-layer gear 452 can be easily formed into a two-layer structure, and the tooth thickness (dimensions in the continuous direction of the teeth) is formed. ) And the teeth are enlarged.

The disk portion 452c is formed by being superposed on the gear teeth of the transmission gear 451 adjacent to the two-layer gear 452 and the gear teeth of the reversing gear 453 adjacent to the two-layer gear 452 in an axial view (FIG. 21B). reference). As a result, when the transmission gear 451 and the reversing gear 453 move in the axial direction, the transmission gear 451 and the reversing gear 453 are prevented from wobbling due to the respective gear teeth coming into contact with the disk portion 452c. It is possible to suppress further movement of the transmission gear 451 and the reversing gear 453.

The reversing gear 453 is a member that reverses the half-moon member 460 by being meshed with and rotated by the two-layer gear 452, and the main body portion 453a formed into a tubular body through which the tubular main body 462a of the half-moon member 460 can be inserted. And the reversing gear tooth 453b formed outward from one end of the main body portion 453a, and the main body portion 453a formed adjacent to the reversing gear tooth 453b in the direction along the outer circumference of the tubular main body 462a. An arcuate recess 453c, which is an arcuate wall surface that is arranged on the axis of the two-layer gear 452 and is slid on the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, and a wide projecting portion formed by the arcuate recess 453c. It mainly includes an engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d and a locking protrusion 453e projecting in the radial direction from a position where the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 453a is divided into three equal parts.

The reversing gear teeth 453b are engraved with starting gear teeth 453b1 having a larger size (tooth thickness and tooth injury) than the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 (gear teeth other than both ends) at both ends thereof. The recessed portion 453b3 formed between the starting gear tooth 453b1 and the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d as a receiving portion of the gear tooth is deeper than the recess formed between the gear teeth of the intermediate gear tooth 453b2. It is formed. As a result, the starting gear teeth 452b1 formed larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 can be accepted in good meshing (a state in which the gear teeth are deeply meshed). Therefore, even if the size of the gear teeth is different for each tooth, the tooth engagement relationship between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 can be kept good.

The arcuate recess 453c is a portion that comes into contact with the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, and is formed with a radius of curvature substantially the same as the radius of the sliding wall portion 452d.

The locking protrusion 453e is fitted to the arcuate wall portion 461c formed on the main body portion 461 of the half-moon member 460 in such a manner that it cannot rotate relative to each other. As a result, the reversing gear 453 and the half moon member 460 are integrally rotated.

Next, the half-moon member 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. 14 is a front perspective view of the half moon member 460, and FIG. 15 is a rear perspective view of the half moon member 460. Note that FIGS. 14 and 15 show a state in which the front cover 466 is removed from the main body portion 461 of the half-moon member 460.

The half-moon member 460 is a member that is arranged in the center of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 10) and is axially rotated in such a manner that it is inverted up and down as the slide member 420 slides, and is a semicircular plate. A central gear 462 having a main body 461 which is a member and forms the skeleton of the half-moon member 460, a tubular main body 462a inserted into a connecting hole 461a formed near the center of the main body 461, and a central gear 462 thereof. A plurality of claw members 463 that are slid along the main body 461 with the rotation of the gear, a crank gear 464 having a slide pin 464b that is inserted into a slide hole 463a formed at the base of the claw member 463, and a center. A transmission gear group 465 that is arranged between the gear 462 and the crank gear 464 and meshed with the center gear 462 and the crank gear 464, and a front cover 466 that is fastened and fixed from the front side of the main body 461. It mainly includes a drive lever 467 (see FIG. 12) that is fastened and fixed to the end of the tubular main body 462a of the central gear 462.

The main body 461 has a connecting hole 461a through which the center gear 462 is inserted, a plurality of shaft support pins 461b on which the crank gear 464 and the transmission gear group 465 are pivotally supported, and an inner circumference of the reversing gear 453 around the connecting hole 461a. An arcuate wall portion 461c that is projected with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter and has a notch for fitting the locking protrusion 453e, a claw-shaped hook portion 461d on which an urging spring is hooked, and from the back surface. Mainly provided with a protruding locking pin 461e.

The locking pin 461e is inserted into the rotation control hole 421b of the slide member 420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 21A). As a result, the rotation angle of the half-moon member 460 is regulated.

The center gear 462 includes a tubular main body 462a inserted into the connecting hole 461a of the main body 461, a flange portion 462b formed in a radial direction from one end of the tubular main body 462a, and a flange portion thereof. A drive lever 467 can be fastened and fixed to the gear teeth 462c engraved radially inward from the outer peripheral surface of the 462b and the other end, which is the opposite end of one end of the tubular body 462a. Mainly includes a fastening hole 462d to be formed, and a claw-shaped hook portion 462e to which one end is hooked on the hook portion 461d of the main body portion 461 and the other end of the biasing spring is hooked.

The claw member 463 mainly includes a long hole-shaped slide hole 463a through which the slide pin 464b of the crank gear 464 is inserted, and a slide plate portion 463b which is a long plate-like body projecting from the front side. ..

The slide plate portion 463b is inserted into the elongated slide hole 466a formed in the front cover 466. As a result, the claw member 463 is formed so as to be slidable in the extending direction of the slide hole 466a of the front cover 466.

The crank gear 464 is a slide that is pivotally supported by a shaft support pin 461b of the main body 461 and has gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the main body 464a and a slide that projects eccentrically from the rotation shaft of the main body 464a. Mainly includes pins 464b.

The main body portion 464a is meshed with the central gear 462 and the transmission gear group 465, so that the main body portion 464a is rotated with the rotation of the central gear 462.

The slide pin 464b is moved around the respective shaft support pins 461b by rotating the main body portion 464a. As a result, the slide pin 464b is moved between a first position (see FIG. 14) that is located close to the center gear 462 and a second position that is located away from the center gear 462. By the movement of the slide pin 464b, the claw member 463 is moved along the slide hole 466a of the front cover 466 (see FIG. 26B).

The front cover 466 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body portion 461 and accommodates each member of the half moon member 460 between the main body portion 461, and the slide plate portion 463b of the claw member 463 is inserted therethrough. An elongated slide hole 466a is bored.

The drive lever 467 is an insertion hole 467b (FIG. 13) formed at a position corresponding to a long plate-shaped lever portion 467a (see FIG. 13) extending radially outward and a fastening hole 462d of the central gear 462. 13) and mainly.

The lever portion 467a (see FIG. 13) is a portion pushed by the slide rack 442, and the center gear 462 is rotated by pushing the lever portion 467a by the slide rack 442.

It will be described back to FIG. 10 to FIG. The drive device 470 is arranged so as to be raised to the front side in the central portion of the base member 410, and is fastened and fixed to the base member 410 with a fastening plate portion 471 and a drive motor 472 fastened and fixed to the fastening plate portion 471. And a drive gear 473 inserted into the drive shaft of the drive motor 472.

The fastening plate portion 471 includes a pair of regulation wall portions 471a and 471b formed in an arc shape in cross section along the outer shape of the motor case of the drive gear 472 and extending to the front side, and one of the regulation wall portions 471a ( The inner side in the assembled state is extended to a substantially intermediate position of the motor case, and the other regulation wall portion 471b (outer side in the assembled state) is extended longer than the extended end of the one regulation wall part 471a. These pair of regulation wall portions 471a and 471b are used as guides when the drive motor 472 is pulled out from the fastening plate portion 471.

The drive gear 473 is arranged to face the rack gear 422a of the pair of slide members 420 from both sides and is meshed from both sides.

Next, the outline of the movement of the pair of slide members 420 of the composite operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. 16 and 18 are partial front views of the combined operation unit 400, FIG. 17 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 on the line XVIIa-XVIIa of FIG. 16, and FIG. 17 (b) is a partial sectional view. 17 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit 400 after the drive device 470 is moved, and FIG. 19 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit 400 in the XIXa-XIXa line of FIG. 19 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 after the drive motor 472 is separated from the drive gear 473 from FIG. 19 (a). Note that FIGS. 16 and 17 show a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIGS. 18 and 19 show a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged in the overhanging position.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18, the pair of slide members 420 sandwich the drive gear 473 of the drive device 470 between the transmitted leg portions 422 of each other. At this time, the rack gear 422a of the transmitted leg portion 422 arranged to face each other across the drive gear 473 is meshed with the single drive gear 473. As a result, the drive gear 473 is rotated by the drive motor 472, so that the transmitted leg portions 422 arranged to face each other across the drive gear 473 are slidably moved in synchronization with each other.

That is, in the state where the slide member 420 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the drive gear 473 is rotated clockwise in the front view, so that the upper slide member 420 moves downward and the lower slide member 420. Are moved upwards at constant speed with each other. At this time, the drive motors 472 arranged in pairs on the left and right are synchronously controlled, and the pair of slide members can be stably slid.

Further, the weights of the pair of slide members 420 are applied in opposite directions to the drive gear 473. For example, the drive gear 473 on the right side of the front view is weighted from the upper slide member 420 in the direction of rotating the drive gear 473 clockwise, and the drive gear 473 is counterclockwise from the lower slide member 420. Weight is applied in the direction of rotation. As a result, if the weights of the pair of slide members 420 are made equal, even if the power of the drive motor 472 is cut off, the drive gear 473 can be kept stopped due to the balance of the weights of the pair of slide members 420. Therefore, even if the power of the drive motor 472 is cut off when the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at an arbitrary position, the pair of slide members 420 can be kept stopped at that position.

The pair of transmitted legs 422 of the slide member 420 are meshed with the drive gear 473 from the same direction. That is, for example, the pair of left and right transmitted leg portions 422 of the upper slide member 420 are meshed with the drive gear 473 from the right side in front view, and the pair of left and right transmitted leg portions 422 of the lower slide member 420 are left and right. Both are engaged with the drive gear 473 from the left side when viewed from the front.

As a result, even if one of the transmitted legs 422 meshed with the drive gear 473 suddenly moves (for example, even if the distance from the driven gear 473 meshed with the drive gear 473 increases). The other transmitted leg portion 422 connected via the one transmitted leg portion 422 and the main body portion 421 is moved in the same direction as the one transmitted leg portion 422. That is, since the drive gear 473 is moved away from the driven gear 473 to be meshed with, it is possible to suppress applying a large load to the drive gear 473 meshed with the other leg to be transmitted 422.

Here, for example, one of the transmitted legs 422 of the slide member 420 is meshed with the drive gear 473 from the front right side, and the other transmitted leg 422 is meshed with the drive gear 473 from the front left side. Then, one of the transmitted legs 422 is moved from the drive gear 473 in a direction in which the distance increases, so that the other transmitted leg 422 is pressed against the drive gear 473. As a result, a large load is applied to the drive gear 473 meshed with the other leg to be transmitted 422.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since it is possible to prevent a large load from being applied to the drive gear 473 as described above, the proper meshing relationship between the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the transmitted leg portion 422 is appropriate. Can be achieved. Further, the shapes of the pair of slide members 420 can be made equivalent, and the members can be standardized.

As shown in FIG. 19A, the drive gear 473 and the front side wall portion 422c interfere with each other in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction of the paper surface in FIG. 19A). On the other hand, in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state of being spaced from the outer shape of the cutout portion 422d in the front view. The positional relationship between the slide member 420 and the drive gear 473, which "can visually recognize the drive gear 473 with a distance from the outer shape of the cutout portion 422d in front view," will be described as a specific phase position.

Therefore, in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position (specific phase position) which is the end of the movable range, the drive gear 473 can be pulled out through the notch portion 422d formed in the transmitted leg portion 422. .. As a result, the drive gear 473 can be replaced without removing the slide member 420 from the base member 410 (see FIG. 17B). Therefore, the maintainability of the drive gear 473 can be improved.

Here, the pair of slide members 420 are arranged so as to face each other with the drive gear 473 interposed therebetween, and are meshed with the drive gear 473 by the rack gears 422a of the respective legs to be transmitted 422. In this state, since it is necessary to form a state in which both of the pair of slide members 420 are similarly arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a are meshed with arbitrary gear teeth. It's not good. That is, the relationship between the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the pair of slide members 420 is fixed so that they mesh with each other (the representative gear tooth of the rack gear 422a that comes into contact with the representative gear tooth of the drive gear 473 at the time of meshing). Is defined) to form a proper tooth alignment.

A cutout portion 422d of the slide member 420 can be used to form the proper meshing state. That is, in the notch portion 422d, as described above, in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the representative circle slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the drive gear 473 rotates the drive gear 473. When the axis and the central axis are aligned, it is formed in a portion projected on the front side wall portion 422c in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper surface of FIG. 16).

Therefore, in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 16), the cutout portions 422d are arranged so as to face each other. In this state, the drive gear 473 is moved through the notch portion 422d (moved in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 16), so that the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a can be meshed in a proper meshing state.

In a state where the pair of slide members 420 are arranged in the retracted position (specific phase position), the pair of slide members 420 are blocked from moving outward in the vertical direction (the upper slide member 420 is upward and the lower slide member 420). 420 is blocked from further downward movement). That is, when the slide member 420 is randomly moved to the retracted position side, the slide member 420 is stopped at least at the retracted position (movement resistance increases).

Therefore, in adjusting the position of the slide member 420 when the maintenance worker replaces the drive gear 473, the slide member 420 is at the end of the movable range even if the slide member 420 is randomly moved in the retracting direction (specific phase). Position) is stopped. As a result, the drive gear 473 can be easily taken out through the notch portion 422d, and in that state, the drive gear 473 can be easily meshed with the rack gear 422a of the pair of slide members 420. Therefore, maintainability can be improved.

The arrangement of the drive device 470 will be described with reference to FIG. 17A. As described above, since the notch portion 422d is formed in the pair of slide members 420, the drive device 470 in the assembled state is fastened and fixed to the base member 410 with the pair of slide members 420 arranged in the retracted position. be able to. Thereby, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the drive device 470 can be improved.

That is, when the cutout portion 422d is not formed in the front side wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 (for example, when the front side wall portion 422c is formed in the entire region of the rack gear 422a), the drive device 470 is used as the base member 410. Even if it is attempted to be assembled, the drive gear 473 comes into contact with the front side wall portion 422c, and the drive device 470 cannot be assembled to the base member 410. Therefore, the drive device 470 has to be arranged on the opposite side of the front side wall portion 422c, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of the drive device 470 is low.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the notch portion 422d is formed in the front side wall portion 422c. Therefore, by moving the drive gear 473 in the front-rear direction through the notch portion 422d, the drive device 470 is moved to the slide member 420. It can be arranged on the front side (the side on which the front side wall portion 422c is arranged). Therefore, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the drive device 470 can be improved.

Further, a front side wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 is formed in the layer between the drive gear 473 and the drive motor 472, and by moving the slide member 420 from the retracted position, the drive gear 473 and the front side wall portion 422c are moved back and forth. It can be overlapped in a directional view (FIG. 16 vertical view on paper). Thereby, when the drive device 470 is replaced, it is possible to select whether to remove the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 together, or to remove only the drive motor 472 while leaving the drive gear 473.

That is, the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 can be separated by pulling out the drive motor 472 while keeping the drive gear 473 in contact with the front side wall portion 422c of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 19B). .. As a result, the drive motor 472 can be replaced while maintaining the meshed state between the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the transmitted leg portion 422. Therefore, before and after the replacement of the drive motor 472, it is possible to eliminate the need for re-meshing adjustment of the drive gear 473 and the rack gear 422a of the transmitted leg portion 422, and it is possible to improve maintainability.

At this time, the drive gear 473 overlaps with the front side wall portion 422c of the pair of transmitted leg portions 422 arranged so as to face each other with the drive gear 473 in between in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 18 in the vertical direction on the paper) (see FIG. 18). Therefore, when the drive gear 473 is pulled out from the drive motor 472, a force is applied to the drive gear 473 from at least two points arranged so as to face each other across the rotation shaft. Therefore, tilting of the drive motor 472 with respect to the drive gear 473 is suppressed.

Further, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out from the fastening plate portion 471, the drive motor 472 can be moved along the regulation wall portions 471a and 471b while being pressed against the regulation wall portions 471a and 471b, so that the drive motor 472 can be moved. It is possible to prevent the axis from tilting with respect to the drive gear 473. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive gear 473 from being deformed.

As shown in FIG. 19A, one of the regulation wall portions 471a is formed so as to retract from the front end surface of the motor case of the drive motor 472 to the fastening plate portion 471 side. As a result, the drive motor 472 can be pulled out with the extended end of one of the regulation wall portions 471a as the fulcrum S. That is, since the extended end of one regulation wall portion 471a and the side surface of the drive motor 472 are arranged adjacent to each other, the extended end of one regulation wall portion 471a is used as a fulcrum S and the side surface of the drive motor 472 (FIG. 19). In (a), the action point W is shown inside the drive motor 472 for easy understanding), and the distance between the fulcrum S and the action point W when a force is applied to the drive motor 472 is the shortest. Can be. As a result, the force required for pulling out the drive motor 472 can be suppressed depending on the setting of the force point. Note that FIG. 19A illustrates the relationship between the fulcrum S and the point of action W and a virtual lever.

Further, the drive motor 472 can be pulled out while pressing the drive motor 472 against the other regulation wall portion 471b arranged to face the one regulation wall portion 471a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the degree of inclination of the drive motor 472 with respect to the drive gear 473 when the drive motor 472 is pulled out.

As shown in FIG. 19A, the other regulation wall portion 471b is formed so as to project forward (upper in FIG. 19A) from the extended end portion of the one regulation wall portion 471a. As a result, when the drive motor 472 is pulled out with one regulation wall portion 471a as the fulcrum S, the drive motor 472 is driven from the other regulation wall portion 471b in the state W1 in which the action point W is closest to the other regulation wall portion 471b. A force can be applied in the direction of pushing back to the point of action W. Therefore, the other regulating wall portion 471b can prevent the drive motor 472 from moving in the direction perpendicular to the drive shaft. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the drive motor 472 from moving in a direction away from one of the regulation wall portions 471a when the drive motor 472 is pulled out.

Next, the two-layer gear 452 involved in the rotation of the half-moon member 460 of the composite operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (a) is a front view of the double-layer gear 452, and FIG. 20 (b) is a rear view of the double-layer gear 452.

As shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the two-layer gear 452 is a gear member in which different gear teeth are engraved on the front side and the back side with the disk portion 452c as a boundary. As shown in FIG. 20A, the starting gear tooth 452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d is formed to be larger than the intermediate gear tooth 452b2. Therefore, as will be described later, the starting gear tooth 452b1 can be provided with durability that can withstand a collision (contact) with the reversing gear 453. In the present embodiment, only the starting gear tooth 452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d is formed to be large, and the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 is formed to be small, so that durability is improved and material cost is suppressed. It is possible to achieve both.

The two-layer gear 452 includes a recessed bottom wall portion 452e as a wall surface forming the bottom of the first recessed portion 452b3 and the second recessed portion 452b4, and a push-back rib 452f connecting the recessed bottom wall portion 452e and the ring-shaped rib. , Equipped with.

Here, the second recessed portion 452b4 is required to have a sufficient depth as a recess for receiving the starting gear tooth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23), while the first recessed portion 452b3 is engaged with the reversing gear 453. It is a recess into which the projecting receiving portion 453d enters. Therefore, the depth of the second recessed portion 452b4 is not required, but in the present embodiment, the depths of the first recessed portion 452b3 and the second recessed portion 452b4 are formed to be substantially the same. As a result, the amount of heat shrinkage of the resin material in the vicinity of the first recessed portion 452b3 and the second recessed portion 452b4 at the time of molding the two-layer gear 452 can be made uniform, and the moldability of the two-layer gear 452 can be improved. it can.

As shown in FIG. 20A, a space is formed in a region surrounded by the sliding wall portion 452d, the wall portion formed by the tooth bottom of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2, and the recessed bottom wall portion 452e. At this time, since the sliding wall portion 452d and the recessed bottom wall portion 452e are formed to have substantially the same plate thickness, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of sink marks peculiar to resin molding. In addition, the material cost of the resin material can be suppressed.

Here, the recessed bottom wall portion 452e is not always necessary to secure the function of the two-layer gear 452. On the other hand, the recessed bottom wall portion 452e is formed so that the starting gear tooth 452b1 and the sliding wall portion 452d are connected to each other. Therefore, the impact when the starting gear tooth 452b1 comes into contact with the reversing gear 453 can be dispersed (see FIG. 23B).

The push-back rib 452f is connected to the recessed bottom wall portion 452e of the second recessed portion 452b4. Here, the direction of the force line of the force F generated when the reversing gear 453 is brought into contact with the starting gear tooth 452b1 (see FIG. 23B) is directed toward the pushback rib 452f. As a result, even when a space is formed in the region surrounded by the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, the wall portion formed by the tooth bottom of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2, and the recessed bottom wall portion 452e, the pushback rib 452f Therefore, the resistance to the force F can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the starting gear tooth 452b1 from being deformed by the impact at the time of contact.

As shown in FIG. 20B, the gear teeth 452a are formed around the two-layer gear 452. Since the gear teeth 452a are always meshed with the transmission gear 451 (see FIG. 21B), the two-layer gear 452 is constantly rotated when the slide member 420 slides up and down (see FIG. 21A). ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 26, the details of the movement of the composite operation unit 400, that is, the operations of the slide member 420 and the half-moon member 460 that are moved by transmitting the driving force of the driving device 470 will be described. To do. 21 to 26 show the operation of the combined operation unit 400 in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 21 to 26, the illustration of the back cover 430 is omitted for ease of understanding.

21 (a) and 22 (a) are rear views of the combined operation unit 400, and FIGS. 21 (b) and 22 (b) are rear views of the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453. Note that FIG. 21 shows a state in which the pair of slide members 420 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 22 shows that the pair of slide members are slid and moved by a predetermined distance from the retracted position and the reversing gear 453 engages with each other. The state in which the end portion of the shape receiving portion 453d is arranged to face the first recessed portion 452b3 of the two-layer gear 452 is shown. Further, in FIGS. 21 (b) and 22 (b), in the two-layer gear 452, the dividing gear tooth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d are shown by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are shown by imaginary lines. Tooth.

As shown in FIG. 21B, in a state where the pair of slide members 420 are arranged in the retracted position, in the reversing gear 453, the arcuate recess 453c of the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d slides the two-layer gear 452. It is circumscribed to the wall portion 452d on a surface. As a result, the posture of the reversing gear 453 can be maintained.

In this case, the mechanical fitting of the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d and the sliding wall portion 452d acts as a holding mechanism for maintaining the posture of the reversing gear 453. Therefore, it is not necessary to dispose another member such as an elastic spring in order to maintain the posture of the reversing gear 453.

Further, the sliding wall portion 452d of the double-layer gear 452 and the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 come into contact with each other on both sides of a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the double-layer gear 452 and the rotating shaft of the reversing gear 453. Will be done. Therefore, the rotation of the reversing gear 453 can be prevented regardless of the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453, and the posture of the reversing gear 453 can be maintained.

As shown in FIG. 22B, when the pair of slide members 420 are moved, the transmission gear 451 meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 among the plurality of transmission gears 451 is rotated. Along with the rotation, the two-layer gear 452 meshed with the other transmission gear 451 and the transmission gear 451 by the gear teeth 452 is also rotated. On the other hand, since the reversing gear 453 is not meshed with the two-layer gear 452, it is maintained in the same posture as the retracted position.

While the pair of slide members 420 are moving, the arcuate recess 453c of the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d receives sliding friction from the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452. In the present embodiment, the arcuate concave portion 453c of the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d is circumscribed on the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452, thereby suppressing the concentration of sliding friction in one place. The frictional force can be dispersed throughout the arcuate recess 453c. As a result, it is possible to prevent a large force from being locally applied to the reversing gear 453 from the two-layer gear 452. Further, the effect of maintaining the posture of the reversing gear 453 can be improved by increasing the number of places where the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 come into contact with each other.

23 (a) and 23 (b) are rear views of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453. Note that FIG. 23 (a) shows a state in which the two-layer gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from FIG. 22 (b), and FIG. 23 (b) shows the state of FIG. 23 (a). A state in which the two-layer gear 452 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state is shown. Further, in FIG. 23, in the two-layer gear 452, the dividing gear teeth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d are shown by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are shown by imaginary lines.

As described above in FIG. 22B, the end of the engaging protrusion 453d of the reversing gear 453 is a double-layer gear before the reversing gear 453 is brought into contact with the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452. It is arranged so as to face the first recessed portion 452b3 of 452.

At this time, since the end portion of the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d arranged to face the first recessed portion 452b3 is not in contact with the two-layer gear 452, the effect of maintaining the posture of the reversing gear 453 is released, and at least It is possible to rotate in the rotation direction of 1 (clockwise in FIG. 22B).

As shown in FIG. 23A, the double-layer gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount in FIG. 23A, so that the reversing gear 453 is brought into contact with the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452. It is rotated before it is turned on. That is, the reversing gear 453 is rotated by the sliding friction applied from the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 to the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453. At this time, the reversing gear 453 is rotated in such a manner that the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d is brought into the first recessed portion 452b3 of the two-layer gear 452.

That is, the reversing gear 453 was slightly rotated by the sliding friction applied from the sliding wall portion 452d of the double-layer gear 452 to the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23A). It comes into contact with the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the layer gear 452 (see FIG. 23B). As a result, it is possible to suppress the impact when the reversing gear 453 and the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 come into contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 23B, the position where the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 start to come into contact with each other is a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the double-layer gear 452 and the rotating shaft of the reversing gear 453. The two-layer gear 452 is formed at a position (upper in FIG. 23B) returned to the opposite side in the rotation direction.

As a result, the force applied to the reversing gear 453 when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 start to come into contact with each other is a component that points in the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453 and the rotation shaft of the reversing gear 453. It is transmitted separately from the ingredients that are suitable for gears. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reversing gear 453 from rotating too much at the start of contact between the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453.

That is, when the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 start to come into contact with the reversing gear 453, the plurality of teeth do not mesh with each other from the beginning. Therefore, when the force applied in the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453 is excessive when the two-layer gear 452 comes into contact with the starting gear teeth 452b1, the reversing gear 453 rotates at a speed higher than the rotation speed of the two-layer gear 452 ( May move). In that case, the meshing of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 may fail.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the force applied from the two-layer gear 452 to the reversing gear 453 at the start of contact is also generated in a direction perpendicular to the rotation direction of the reversing gear 453 (direction toward the rotation axis). , The rotational resistance of the reversing gear 453 can be temporarily increased. That is, the rotational resistance can be increased by pressing the reversing gear 453 against the rotating shaft. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reversing gear 453 from rotating too much at the start of contact of the two-layer gear 452 with the starting gear teeth 452b1.

Further, since the starting gear teeth 452b1 and 453b1 are formed to be larger than the gear teeth 452a of the two-layer gear 452, it is possible to prevent the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 from coming off at the start of meshing. ..

Here, since the play (backlash) formed becomes larger as the gear teeth become larger, the larger the teeth, the larger the deviation of the positional relationship (phase relationship) between the gears to be meshed from the middle can be tolerated. become. That is, when the teeth of the gears are miniaturized, even if the positional relationship (phase relationship) between the gears to be meshed is slightly shifted, there is a possibility that the teeth to be meshed are shifted by one tooth.

In the present embodiment, the double-layer gear 452 has more play (backlash) generated between the transmission gear 451 to which the driving force of the drive device 470 (see FIG. 10) is transmitted and the gear teeth 452a of the double-layer gear 452. The play (backlash) generated between the starting gear tooth 452b1 and the starting gear tooth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 is larger. That is, the phase shift of the two-layer gear 452 that occurs in relation to the transmission gear 451 is smaller than the phase shift that occurs between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453, and is acceptable. As a result, it is possible to prevent tooth misalignment at the start of meshing between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453.

When the two-layer gear 452 starts to come into contact with the reversing gear 453 in the rotational direction, the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 start to come into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453. That is, the engaging protrusion 453d is used as a substitute for the gear tooth that begins to mesh with the starting gear tooth 452b1. Thereby, the durability of the reversing gear 453 can be improved.

That is, the engaging protrusion 453d on which the arcuate recess 453c is formed is not a portion that has a role of engaging with the gear teeth of the two-layer gear 452, but a reversing gear by abutting on the outer peripheral surface of the two-layer gear 452. It is a part of the role of maintaining the posture of 453. Therefore, unlike the gear teeth, the size is not limited according to the size of the gear teeth on the mating side. Further, it is desirable that the portion of the two-layer gear 452 that is brought into contact with the engaging protruding receiving portion 453d and the reversing gear 453 at the start of contact is large and durable, and the engaging protruding receiving portion 453d is used as that portion. By using it, the durability of the reversing gear 453 can be improved.

When the slide member 420 is moved by the driving force of the driving device 470 (see FIG. 10), the transmission gear 451 meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a is rotated, and the two-layer gear 452 is rotated accordingly. That is, the drive device 470 and the two-layer gear 452 are not directly meshed with each other, and at least the transmitted leg portion 422 meshed with the drive gear 473 is interposed between the drive device 470 and the two-layer gear 452. To do. As a result, the impact at the time of contact between the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 is transmitted to the drive device 470 in a relaxed state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drive device 470 from being damaged by the impact at the time of contact.

24 (a) and 25 (a) are rear views of the combined operation unit 400, and FIGS. 24 (b) and 25 (b) are rear views of the double-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453. In FIG. 24, a state in which the pair of half-moon members 460 are rotated by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 22 (a) is shown, and in FIG. 25, the pair of half-moon members 460 are respectively rotated from the state of FIG. 22 (a). The state immediately after the rotation of 180 degrees is completed is shown. Further, in FIGS. 24 (b) and 25 (b), in the two-layer gear 452, the dividing gear tooth 452b and the sliding wall portion 452d are shown by solid lines, and the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are shown by imaginary lines. Tooth.

As shown in FIG. 24B, in a state where the half moon member 460 is rotated, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 453 are meshed with each other.

In the present embodiment, the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 are formed to be larger than the intermediate gear teeth 452b2. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear tooth 452b1 that comes into contact with the reversing gear 453 at the start of contact with the reversing gear 453 is improved, and damage to the double-layer gear 452 can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24B, the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 are meshed with the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 and 453b2, so that the backlash occurs when the meshing continues rather than when the meshing starts. Can be made smaller. As a result, the rotation of the reversing gear 453 when the meshing is continued can be made smooth. Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the starting gear teeth 452b1 that collide with each other at the start of meshing and to improve the smoothness of rotation of the reversing gear 453.

Further, since the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 are formed smaller than the gear teeth 452a, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 453 mesh with each other in the circumferential direction. The error (play) of is smaller than the meshing error between the gear teeth 452a and the transmission gear 451. As a result, the accuracy of the operation of the reversing gear 453 when the meshing is continued can be maintained below the meshing error between the gear teeth 452a and the transmission gear 451.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the half-moon member 460 finishes rotating 180 degrees, the engagement between the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 is released, and the sliding wall portion 452d of the two-layer gear 452 and the circle of the reversing gear. The arc-shaped recess 453c is brought into contact with the surface. Therefore, the posture of the reversing gear 453 is maintained, and the locking protrusion 453e (see FIG. 12) and the arcuate wall portion 461c (see FIG. 15) of the reversing gear 453 are fitted to each other so as not to rotate relative to each other. The posture of is also maintained.

Next, the operation of the claw member 463 of the half moon member 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. 26 (a) and 26 (b) are partial rear views of the combined operation unit 400.

In FIG. 26, the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 410 is partially omitted so that the limited rack gear 414b can be visually recognized and the portion is magnified. Further, FIG. 26A shows a state immediately before the starting gear tooth 441a of the deformed gear 441 comes into contact with the starting gear tooth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b, and FIG. 26B shows the slide rack 442 moving. The state of reaching the end is shown.

The engagement between the deformed gear teeth 441 and the limited rack gear 414b becomes defective unless the deformed gear 441 is brought into contact with the limited rack gear 414b in an appropriate posture. That is, if the deformed gear 441 comes into contact with the limited rack gear 414b in a posture in which the starting gear teeth 441a of the deformed gear 441 and the starting gear teeth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b are in contact with each other, the teeth are satisfactorily meshed. On the other hand, for example, when the gear teeth of the deformed gear 441 other than the starting gear teeth 441a come into contact with the starting gear teeth 414b1 of the limited rack gear 414b, a poor meshing occurs in the middle of the meshing. , The rotation of the deformed gear 441 cannot be continued. In this case, the slide movement of the slide member 420 is also stopped, so that the slide member 420 malfunctions.

In the present embodiment, the slide rack 442 is maintained to the left and right outward by the urging force of the urging spring 442c. The deformed gear 441 receives a force from the slide rack 442 via the transmission gear 443. Therefore, the posture of the deformed gear 441 can be maintained in the above-mentioned appropriate posture.

As shown in FIG. 26B, the deformed gear 441 is meshed with the limited rack gear 414b and rotated, so that the transmission gear 443 is rotated and the slide rack 442 is moved. The slide rack 442 comes into contact with the drive lever 467 in the middle of movement, and the drive lever 467 rotates. Since the drive lever 467 is fastened and fixed to the center gear 462 (see FIG. 15) of the half-moon member 460, the center gear 462 rotates when the drive lever 467 rotates. As a result, the crank gear 464 is rotated (see FIG. 14), and the claw member 463 is moved in the projecting direction. Therefore, the claw member 463 can be moved in conjunction with the movement of the slide member 420.

Next, the combined operation unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28.

In the first embodiment, the case where the cutout portion 422d of the transmitted leg portion 422 is arranged to face the front side of the drive gear 473 while the slide member 420 is arranged in the retracted position has been described, but the second embodiment has been described. In the combined operation unit 2400 in the above, the cutout portion 2422d of the transmitted leg portion 2422 is arranged to face the front side of the drive gear 473 while the slide member 2420 is moving from the retracted position to the overhanging position. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

27 and 28 are front views of the pair of slide members 2420. Note that FIG. 27 shows a state in which the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 28 shows the start gear teeth 452b1 and the start of the second gear group 450 in which the pair of slide members 2420 are moved from the retracted position. The state in which the gear 453b1 (see FIG. 23B) begins to come into contact is illustrated. Further, the illustration of the drive device 470 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIG. 27, in a state where the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged in the retracted position, they are covered on the front side of the drive gear 473 (the front side of the paper in FIG. 27) on the front side of the rack gear 422a in the tooth width direction. The front side wall portion 2422c is overlapped.

As shown in FIG. 28, the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged at positions where the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the double layer gear 452 and the starting gear teeth 453b1 of the reversing gear 453 (see FIG. 23B) start to come into contact with each other. In the state, the notch portion 2422d is formed on the front side (front side of the paper in FIG. 27) of the drive gear 473. The notch portion 2422d is formed in a circular shape slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the drive gear 473.

As shown in FIG. 28, the drive gear 473 can be visually recognized in a state of being separated from the outer shape of the notch portion 2422d in a front view (specific phase position). Therefore, the drive gear 473 can be pulled out through the notch portion 2422d formed in the transmitted leg portion 2422, whereby the drive gear 473 can be replaced without removing the slide member 2420 from the base member 2410. Therefore, the maintainability of the drive gear 473 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, a specific phase position is set in a state where the pair of slide members 2420 are moved from the retracted position and the starting gear teeth 452b1 and the starting gear teeth 453b1 (see FIG. 23A) of the second gear group 450 start to come into contact with each other. Therefore, the maintenance worker can move the slide member 2420 to a specific phase position by relying on the increase in resistance when moving the slide member 2420.

That is, when the slide member 2420 is moved, the transmission gear 451 (see FIG. 24A) is always meshed with the permanent rack gear 414a of the base member 2410. Therefore, when the rotational resistance of the transmission gear 451 increases, it can be grasped as the movement resistance of the slide member 2420. Here, since the transmission gear 451 is meshed with the two-layer gear 452, the resistance generated when the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 start meshing is transmitted to the transmission gear 451. Then, the rotation resistance of the transmission gear 451 increases, so that the movement resistance of the slide member 2420 increases. As a result, the maintenance worker can move the slide member 2420 to a specific phase position by relying on the increase in the movement resistance of the slide member 2420.

Here, since the front side wall portion 2422c does not overlap with the drive gear 473 at the specific phase position, the effect of bringing the front side wall portion 2422c into contact with the drive gear 473 and suppressing the wobbling of the drive gear 473 during rotation is weakened.

In the present embodiment, a specific phase position (a state in which the notch portion 2422d matches the drive gear 473) is formed during the movement of the pair of slide members 2420, that is, during the rotation of the drive gear 473. Therefore, when the drive gear 473 approaches the specific phase position, the drive gear 473 has a sufficient speed in the rotation direction (vertical axis direction). Therefore, the wobbling of the drive gear 473, which tends to occur at a specific phase position, can be alleviated by the momentum in the rotation direction of the drive gear 473.

The base member 2410 includes a triangular protrusion 2415 projecting from the center side (center side in FIG. 27) in the assembled state. It is possible to easily move the pair of slide members 2420 to a specific phase position by relying on the triangular protrusion 2415.

Here, in the maintenance of the game machine 13, when the drive motor 472 is removed together with the drive gear 473, it is necessary to arrange the slide member 2420 at a specific phase position. However, since the drive motor 472 is arranged on the front side in a manner of hiding the slide member 2420 (see FIG. 9), it is difficult to visually recognize the state in which the notch portion 2422d coincides with the drive gear 473 from the front side. is there. Therefore, it is difficult to arrange the slide member 2420 at a specific phase position.

On the other hand, since the triangular protrusion 2415 is arranged at a position visible from the front side, it is possible to easily align the slide member 2410 by relying on the triangular protrusion 2415 for maintenance. In the present embodiment, when the pair of slide members 2420 are arranged at specific phase positions, the triangular protrusion 2415 and the triangular pattern formed at the end of the slide member 2420 form a series of patterns. This makes it easy for the maintenance worker to remove the drive gear 473 for maintenance.

Next, the two-layer gear 3452 and the reversing gear 3453 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

In the first embodiment, the case where the starting gear teeth 452b1 and 453b1 of the two-layer gear 452 and the reversing gear 453 are formed large in the direction of the rotation axis, that is, the case where the tooth depth and the tooth thickness are increased has been described. In the two-layer gear 3452 and the reversing gear 3453 according to the third embodiment, the starting gear teeth 3452b1 and 3453b1 are formed to have the same shape as the other gear teeth in the direction of rotation axis, while being formed larger in the axial direction. That is, the tooth width is formed large. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

29 (a) is a front view of the double-layer gear 3452, FIG. 29 (b) is a bottom view of the double-layer gear 3452, and FIG. 29 (c) is a side view of the double-layer gear 3452. ..

As shown in FIG. 29, the two-layer gear 3452 is arranged adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d and has a large tooth width formed on the starting gear tooth 3452b1 and the tooth root side of the starting gear tooth 3452b1. Circumferential rib 3452e extending from the side surface in the circumferential direction along the concentric circles of the two-layer gear 3452 and fixed to the front end surface of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the starting gear tooth 3452b1 and the starting gear. It mainly includes a radial rib 3452f that extends from the radial side surface of the tooth 3452b1 toward the rotation axis and is fixed to the front end surface of the main body of the two-layer gear 3452.

The starting gear tooth 3452b1 has substantially the same tooth depth and tooth thickness as the intermediate gear tooth 452b2, but the tooth width is formed larger than that of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2. As a result, the rigidity of the starting gear tooth 3452b1 can be improved, and it is possible to prevent the starting gear tooth 3452b1 from being damaged at the start of meshing with the reversing gear 3453.

The circumferential rib 3452e is formed to be the widest in the axial direction of the two-layer gear 3452 at the side surface of the starting gear tooth 3452b1, that is, the extension base point, and the width is gradually shortened as the distance from the starting gear tooth 3452b1 increases. That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), it is visually recognized as a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The circumferential rib 3452e can improve the rigidity of the starting gear teeth 3452b along the circumferential direction of the two-layer gear 3452, and can prevent the starting gear teeth 3452b1 from bending in the rotational direction.

Further, the circumferential rib 3452e extends to the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 in the vicinity of the starting gear tooth 3452b1 (up to two adjacent to the starting gear tooth 3452b1 in the present embodiment). This makes it possible to generate a force that pulls the tooth root of the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 toward the starting gear tooth 3452b1 by using the circumferential rib 3452e.

That is, the deformation (deformation toward the direction away from the starting gear tooth 3452b1) that occurs in the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 when the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the starting gear tooth 3452b1 and the reversing gear 3453 mesh with each other is the circumferential rib 3452e. Can be suppressed by

The circumferential rib 3452e is fixed only to the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the starting gear tooth 3452b1 because the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 located at a position away from the starting gear tooth 3452b1 reverses after the rotation becomes steady. By being meshed with the gear 3453.

That is, when the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 (for example, the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 near the middle of the pair of starting gear teeth 3452b1) separated from the starting gear tooth 3452b1 is meshed with the reversing gear 3453, the rotation is already in a steady state. , The reversing gear 3453 has a sufficient rotational speed. Therefore, the force received by the intermediate gear tooth 452b2 from the reversing gear 3453 is small, and reinforcement by the circumferential rib 3452e is unnecessary.

The radial rib 3452f extends from the radial side surface of the starting gear tooth 3452b1 toward the rotation axis and is fixed to the front end surface of the main body of the two-layer gear 3452, so that the starting gear tooth The radial rigidity of 3452b1 can be improved. As a result, the reversing gear 3453 meshed with the two-layer gear 3452 is moved in the axial direction and rattles, so that the front end portion (upper end of FIG. 29B) of the starting gear tooth 3452b1 is forced toward the rotation shaft. Even if it receives, it is possible to prevent the starting gear tooth 3452b1 from falling. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear tooth 3452b1 can be improved.

30 (a) is a front view of the reversing gear 3453, FIG. 30 (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear 3453, and FIG. 30 (c) is a side view of the reversing gear 3453.

As shown in FIG. 30, the reversing gear 3453 extends along the concentric circles of the reversing gear 3453 from the side surface of the starting gear tooth 3453b1 adjacent to the arcuate recess 453c and the tooth root side of the starting gear tooth 3453b1. Along with this, a circumferential rib 3453f fixed to the main body of the reversing gear 3453 is mainly provided.

The starting gear tooth 3453b1 has substantially the same tooth depth and tooth thickness as the other intermediate gear teeth 453b2, while the tooth width is formed larger than that of the other intermediate gear teeth 453b2. Thereby, the rigidity of the starting gear tooth 3453b1 can be improved.

The circumferential rib 3453f is formed to be the widest in the axial direction on the side surface of the starting gear tooth 3453b1, that is, at the extension base point, and the width is gradually shortened as the distance from the starting gear tooth 3453b1 increases. That is, as shown in FIG. 30B, it is visually recognized as a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The circumferential rib 3453f can prevent the starting gear tooth 3453b1 from bending in the rotational direction.

Further, the circumferential rib 3453f is extended toward the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d side adjacent to the starting gear tooth 3453b1. As a result, the rigidity of the starting gear tooth 3453b1 in the direction in which the force is applied from the two-layer gear 3452 (the direction from the starting gear tooth 3453b1 toward the adjacent engaging protrusion 453d) is improved. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear tooth 3453b1 can be improved.

Next, the two-layer gear 4452 and the reversing gear 4453 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32.

In the first embodiment, the case where the starting gear teeth 452b1 of the two-layer gear 452 are formed to be large in the direction of the rotation axis, that is, the case where the tooth depth and the tooth thickness are increased has been described, but in the fourth embodiment, In the two-layer gear 4452, the starting gear teeth 4452b1 are formed to have the same shape as the other gear teeth when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, while the tooth width is formed to be large, and the intermediate gear teeth 4452b2 sandwiched between the starting gear teeth 4452b1. The tooth width is formed in such a manner that the tooth width is shortened as the distance from the starting gear tooth 4452b1 is increased. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

31 (a) is a front view of the double-layer gear 4452, FIG. 31 (b) is a bottom view of the double-layer gear 4452, and FIG. 31 (c) is a view of XXXIc-XXXIc of FIG. 31 (b). It is sectional drawing of the two-layer gear 4452 in line.

As shown in FIG. 31, the two-layer gear 4452 includes a pair of starting gear teeth 4452b1 adjacent to the sliding wall portion 452d, an intermediate gear tooth 4452b2 formed between the starting gear teeth 4452b1, and a starting gear. It mainly includes a plate-shaped portion 4452e that is covered on the front side surface of the tooth 4452b1 and the intermediate gear tooth 4452b2.

As shown in FIG. 31B, the tooth width of the dividing gear tooth 4452b composed of the starting gear tooth 4452b1 and the intermediate gear tooth 4452b2 is maximum in the starting gear tooth 4452b1, and the tooth width of the intermediate gear tooth 4452b2 is started. As it moves away from the gear tooth 4452b1, it is shortened stepwise with reference to the starting gear tooth 4452b1.

The plate-shaped portion 4452e is formed so as to project from the tooth bottom side of the dividing gear tooth 4452b to a position equivalent to the tip circle in front view, and is overlaid on the front side surface of the dividing gear tooth 4452b. The plate-shaped portion 4452e is formed in a manner of drawing a smooth curve in bottom view according to the formation position of the front side surface of the dividing gear tooth 4452b (see FIG. 31 (b)).

Here, consider a case where the front side surface of the dividing gear tooth 4452b is formed on the same plane and the plate-shaped portion 4452e is also formed on the plane. In this case, the disc portion 452c and the plate-shaped portion 4452e are used to increase the allowable amount of the reversing gear 4453 being displaced in the axial direction of the double-layer gear 4452 at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452. If the distance from the gear is increased, the axial position of the rotating reversing gear 4453 cannot be determined. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to accurately determine the axial position of the rotating reversing gear 4453, the reversing gear 4453 is slightly displaced in the axial direction at the start of meshing, so that the reversing gear 4453 moves to the outer periphery of the plate-shaped portion 4452e. It may come into contact with the surface and cause poor meshing.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the axial misalignment (upward in FIG. 31B), which may occur before the reversing gear 4453 is meshed with the two-layer gear 4452, is set as the meshing start position. It can be tolerated to the maximum in the vicinity of the starting gear tooth 4452b1 which is.

Further, the plate-shaped portion 4452e is formed in a manner of drawing a smooth curve in which the distance from the disc portion 452c is shortened as the plate-shaped portion 4452e is separated from the starting gear tooth 4452b1 in the bottom view (see FIG. 31B). Therefore, when the reversing gear 4453 is brought into contact with the plate-shaped portion 4452e, the axial position of the reversing gear 4453 can be corrected more significantly as the teething progresses (moving the reversing gear 4453 downward (FIG. 31 (b)). Can be done). Therefore, the axial misalignment between the two-layer gear 4452 and the reversing gear 4453 at the time of meshing can be corrected as the meshing progresses.

32 (a) is a front view of the reversing gear 4453, FIG. 32 (b) is a bottom view of the reversing gear 4453, and FIG. 32 (c) is a view in the direction of the arrow XXXIIc of FIG. 32 (a). It is a partial side view of the reversing gear 4453.

As shown in FIG. 32, the reversing gear 4453 is an intermediate formed in a region sandwiched between a pair of starting gear teeth 4453b1 arranged adjacent to each other in a pair of arcuate recesses 453c and the starting gear teeth 4453b1. It mainly includes gear teeth 4453b2.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the reversing gear 4453 is formed in such a manner that the tooth width of the starting gear tooth 4453b1 is maximized and the tooth width of the intermediate gear tooth 4453b2 is shortened as the distance from the starting gear tooth 4453b1 is increased. .. The degree of shortening (inclination of the line connecting the upper ends of each gear tooth in FIG. 32B) is the degree of shortening of the tooth width of the dividing gear tooth 4452b of the two-layer gear 4452 (each gear tooth in FIG. 31B). It is formed more gently than the slope of the line connecting the upper ends of.

As shown in FIG. 32 (c), the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 have end faces in the width direction except for the intermediate gear teeth 4453b2 formed farthest from the pair of engaging protrusion receiving portions 453d. (Upper end surface of FIG. 32B) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the engaging protrusion receiving portion side. As a result, it is possible to correct the misalignment more rapidly while maintaining a large allowable amount of the relative misalignment in the axial direction at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452.

That is, when each gear tooth 4453b1, 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 is meshed with the two-layer gear 4452, each gear tooth 4453b1, 4453b2 is on the engaging protrusion receiving portion side (the tooth width is the shortest side, FIG. 32C). From the right side), the teeth start to fit. Therefore, for example, as compared with the case where the dimensions of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 in the tooth width direction are constant on the longest tooth width side (left side in FIG. 32C), the plate-shaped portion 4452e at the start of tooth engagement A large distance (play) between the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to secure a large allowable amount of axial misalignment at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452.

On the other hand, when the meshing of the gear teeth 4453b1, 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 progresses, the longest tooth width side of each gear tooth 4453b1, 4453b2 (left side in FIG. 32C) is the double-layer gear 4452. It enters the back side (lower side of FIG. 31B) of the plate-shaped portion 4452e. As a result, for example, as compared with the case where the dimensions of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 in the tooth width direction are constant on the shortest tooth width side (right side in FIG. 32 (c)), the teeth are released (each tooth is released from each other). The distance (play) between the plate-shaped portion 4452e immediately before (when escaping) and each gear tooth 4453b1 and 4453b2 can be reduced.

Therefore, when the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 mesh with the two-layer gear 4452, between the plate-shaped portion 4452e and the gear teeth 4453b1, 4453b2 between the start of meshing of each gear tooth 4453b1 and 4453b2 and the disengagement. The interval (play) can be reduced. As a result, the misalignment between the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 can be corrected more rapidly.

Further, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the plate-shaped portion 4452e (see FIG. 31B) is formed in the opposite direction to the inclination of the gear teeth 4453b1 and 4453b2 of the reversing gear 4453 (see FIG. 32C). It is possible to improve the effect of making the correction of the misalignment more rapidly while maintaining a large allowable amount of the misalignment in the axial direction at the start of meshing between the reversing gear 4453 and the two-layer gear 4452 described above.

The widthwise end surface (upper end surface of FIG. 32B) of the intermediate gear tooth 4453b2 formed farthest from the pair of engaging protrusion receiving portions 453d is formed on a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the reversing gear 4453. Tooth.

Next, the second gear group 5450 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35.

In the first embodiment, the case where the two-layer gear 452 is formed of only a single resin material has been described, but in the two-layer gear 5452 according to the fifth embodiment, a magnetic material is embedded inside the starting gear teeth 5452b1. Tooth. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 33 is a front view of the two-layer gear 5452. As shown in FIG. 33, in the two-layer gear 5452, an embedding hole 5452g is formed in the starting gear tooth 5452b1 along a direction parallel to the rotation axis, and an embedding member 5452h is embedded in the embedding hole 5452g.

The embedding hole 5452g is formed in a bottomed hole shape having a circular cross-sectional diameter, and the embedding member 5452h is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the embedding hole 5452g. As a result, the embedding member 5452h is fitted and fixed in the embedding hole 5452g.

The embedded member 5452h is a cylindrical member formed of a metal magnetic material or a plastic magnetic material, and the south pole and the north pole are divided into two in a plane along the axis. In FIGS. 33 to 35, the black-painted side of the embedded member 5452h is formed by the north pole, and the opposite side is formed by the south pole.

FIG. 34 is a partial front view of the second gear group 5450. Note that FIG. 34 shows a state immediately before the starting gear tooth 5452b1 of the two-layer gear 5452 abuts on the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 5453. Further, the disk portion 452c of the two-layer gear 5452, the gear teeth 452a, and the transmission gear 451 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the reversing gear 5453, an embedding hole 5453f is bored in the starting gear tooth 5453b1 in a direction parallel to the axis, and an embedding member 5453g is embedded in the embedding hole 5453f. As a result, the embedding member 5453g is fitted and fixed in the embedding hole 5453f.

The embedded member 5453g is a cylindrical member formed of a metal magnetic material or a plastic magnetic material, and the south pole and the north pole are divided into two in a plane along the axis.

As shown in FIG. 34, the plane that divides the magnetic pole into two is formed along the radial direction and is a plane that passes through the axis, and the starting gear teeth 5452b1 and 5453b1 are embedded so that the opposite poles face each other. That is, the starting gear tooth 5452b1 has an N pole formed on the side facing the starting gear tooth 5453b1 at the time of meshing (upper side in FIG. 34), and the starting gear tooth 5453b1 is on the side facing the starting gear tooth 5452b1 at the time of meshing (lower part of FIG. 34). The south pole is formed on the side). As a result, in the meshing of the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453, a magnetic force that attracts the meshing gear teeth 5452b1 and 5453b1 is generated.

That is, as the two-layer gear 5452 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 34 from the state shown in FIG. 34, the distance between the embedded members 5452h and 5453g decreases, so that the magnetic force generated between them increases, and the starting gear tooth 5453b1 becomes the starting gear tooth. Attracted to 5452b1. As a result, the reversing gear 5453 is attracted by the magnetic force and rotated before the starting gear teeth 5452b1 of the two-layer gear 5452 and the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 5453 come into contact with each other. Therefore, as compared with the case where the starting gear tooth 5452b1 abuts on the reversing gear 5453 in the stationary state, the impact at the time of abutting and the load received by the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 at the time of abutting can be relaxed.

FIG. 35 is a partial front view of the second gear group 5450. Note that FIG. 35 shows a state in which the two-layer gear 5452 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 35 by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 34. Further, the disk portion 452c of the two-layer gear 5452, the gear teeth 452a, and the transmission gear 451 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 35, a gap is formed between the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 in front of the two-layer gear 5452 in the rotational direction. As a result, the load applied to the engaging protrusion 453d not only at the start of contact between the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 but also while the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 are rotated by teething. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the strength required for the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d can be lowered, and the degree of freedom in designing the engaging protruding receiving portion 453d can be improved.

Next, the second gear group 6450 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

In the first embodiment, the case where the two-layer gear 452 is integrally formed has been described, but the two-layer gear 6452 in the sixth embodiment has the starting gear tooth 452b1 omitted and is separate from the intermediate gear tooth 452b2. It is configured to include 6452 g of deformed gear tooth members of the body. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 36 is a front exploded perspective view of the two-layer gear 6452. Note that FIG. 36 shows a state in which the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is removed from the disk portion 452c. In the present embodiment, since the deformed gear tooth member 6452 g is formed of a metal material such as iron, it is compared with a portion of the double-layer gear 6452 other than the deformed gear tooth member 6452 g which is integrally formed from the resin material. Therefore, the rigidity of the deformed gear tooth member 6452 g is increased. Further, by partially using a metal material, the weight can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire two-layer gear 6452 is made of a metal material, and the driving force required to rotate the two-layer gear 6452 can be suppressed. it can.

As shown in FIG. 36, the two-layer gear 6452 has a pair of deformed gear tooth members 6452 g and an insertion hole 6452c1 which is a hole through which the deformed gear tooth member 6452 g is inserted and is formed in the disk portion 452c. A notch formed between the first recessed portion 452b3 and the second recessed portion 452b4, the gear tooth side notch 6452b5 in which the gear tooth body portion 6452g1 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is sandwiched, and the sliding wall portion 452d. A sliding portion notch 6452d1 in which a sliding receiving portion 6452g3 of a deformed gear tooth member 6452g is sandwiched, and a hook formed in an L-shaped hook shape at both ends of a sliding wall portion 452d. Mainly includes a mold receiving portion 6452d2.

The deformed gear tooth member 6452g includes a gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 having a shape in which the starting gear tooth 452b1 in the first embodiment is extended toward the tooth bottom side, and the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 from the end opposite to the tooth tip to the back surface. A columnar insertion pin 6452g2 projecting to the side, a sliding receiving portion 6452g3 whose side surface forms a part of the sliding wall portion 452d in the assembled state (see FIG. 37), and a gear tooth body portion 6452g1 sliding. It mainly includes a connecting portion 6452g4 that connects the receiving portion 6452g3.

The gear tooth body portion 6452g1 is formed so that the tooth thickness of the portion sandwiched between the gear tooth side notches 6452b5 is equal to or slightly larger than the size of the gear tooth side notch 6452b5. As a result, the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 is sandwiched between the gear tooth side notches 6452b5 in the assembled state (see FIG. 37).

The sliding receiving portion 6452g3 is formed in such a manner that the outer peripheral surface is smoothly connected to the outer peripheral surface of the sliding wall portion 452d in the assembled state (see FIG. 37). The outer peripheral surface of the connecting portion 6452g4 is arranged to face the recessed bottom wall portion 452e with a slight gap in the assembled state (see FIG. 37).

In the assembled state (see FIG. 37), the insertion pin 6452g2 is inserted into the insertion hole 6452c1 and the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 is sandwiched between the gear tooth side notches 6452b5. Further, the connecting portion 6452g4 is arranged to face the recessed bottom wall portion 452e of the second recessed portion 452b4 with a slight distance, and the inner peripheral side of the sliding receiving portion 6452g3 is brought into contact with the hook type receiving portion 6452d2. As a result, the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 is brought into contact with the reversing gear 453, so that the amount of rotation that rotates about the insertion hole 6452c1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 37 is a front view of the two-layer gear 6452 and the reversing gear 453. In FIG. 37, a state in which the gear tooth main body portion 6452g1 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is in contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453 is shown, and the disk portion 452c is shown by an imaginary line. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 37, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g can receive the load applied from the reversing gear 453 on the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453.

That is, even if the deformed gear tooth member 6452 g is formed of a metal material, the portion supporting the deformed gear tooth member 6452 g is formed of a resin material. Further, the double-layer gear 6452 is not sufficiently rigid because the thickness in the radial direction is formed to be substantially constant in order to prevent the occurrence of sink marks during molding. Therefore, when the deformed gear tooth member 6452g moves (rotates around the insertion hole 6452c1) due to the load generated when the two-layer gear 6452 and the reversing gear 453 come into contact with each other, the pressing force is applied from the deformed gear tooth member 6452g. There is a risk that parts other than the deformed gear tooth member 6452g (such as the recessed bottom wall portion 452e) will be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g begins to move in a direction to fill a slight gap formed between the outer peripheral surface of the connecting portion 6452g4 and the recessed bottom wall portion 452e (with the insertion hole 6452c1 as the axis). When it starts to rotate), the sliding receiving portion 6452g3 of the deformed gear tooth member 6452g is pressed against the arcuate concave portion 453c of the reversing gear 453. The arcuate recess 453c is a portion having a sufficient radial thickness and high rigidity.

As a result, the deformed gear tooth member 6452g can receive the load applied from the reversing gear 453 to the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 453, which is a portion of the two-layer gear 6452 other than the deformed gear tooth member 6452g. The load applied to the portion (recessed bottom wall portion 452e, etc.) can be suppressed. Further, the arcuate recess 453c of the reversing gear 453 can be used to support the deformed gear tooth member 6452g.

Next, the combined operation unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45.

In the first embodiment, the case where the position of the slide member 420 when the half moon member 460 rotates is limited to one way, but the combined operation unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment when the half moon member 460 rotates At least two positions of the slide member 420 can be formed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

38 (a) to 38 (c) are rear views of the two-layer gear 7452. Note that FIG. 38 (a) shows a stationary state in which the rotation of the double-layer gear 7452 is stopped, and FIG. 38 (b) shows the first rotation in which the rotation speed V of the double-layer gear 7452 is lower than the boundary speed Vb. The state of the speed V1 is illustrated, and in FIG. 38 (c), the state where the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is the second rotation speed V2 higher than the boundary speed Vb is shown.

For ease of understanding, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are not shown. This also applies to the subsequent drawings. Further, the boundary speed Vb means the rotational speed V of the double-layer gear 7452 when the protruding gear member 7452e is switched from the immersed state to the extended state.

As shown in FIG. 38, the two-layer gear 7452 is formed with a guide groove 7452d, which is a groove having a rectangular cross section formed radially outward from the rotation axis, and a width slightly smaller than the groove width of the guide groove 7452d. It is mainly composed of a protruding gear member 7452e whose tip is formed in a gear tooth shape, and an urging spring 7452f that connects the protruding gear member 7452e and the rotating shaft of the two-layer gear 7452.

The guide groove 7452d is formed at three locations so as to divide the outer circumference of the two-layer gear 7452 into three equal parts in the circumferential direction, and the protruding gear member 7452e and the urging spring 7452f are arranged in each guide groove 7452d. Further, intermediate gear teeth 452b2 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the two-layer gear 7452 connecting the guide grooves 7452d.

In the protruding gear member 7452e, each protruding gear member 7452e1 to 7452e3 is formed with the same mass, and each urging spring 7452f is formed with the same spring constant.

As shown in FIG. 38 (a), in the stopped state of the two-layer gear 7452, the protruding gear member 7452e is immersed in the rotation shaft side of the surface of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in which the tooth bottoms are connected. At this time, the illegal spring 7452f has a natural length.

As shown in FIG. 38 (b), when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotation speed V1 lower than the boundary speed Vb, the protruding gear member 7452e is moved outward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452. Power is generated. The protruding gear member 7452e is extended to a position where this force and the urging force of the urging spring 7452f are balanced. In the overhanging state, the protruding gear member 7452e is positioned on the rotation axis side of the surface of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in which the tooth tips are connected (immersive state).

Therefore, as will be described later, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotation speed V1, the two-layer gear 7452 does not start meshing with the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 42). That is, the two-layer gear 7452 runs idle with respect to the reversing gear 7453.

As shown in FIG. 38 (c), when the double-layer gear 7452 is rotated at a second rotation speed V2 higher than the boundary speed Vb, the protruding gear member 7452e is moved outward in the radial direction of the double-layer gear 7452. Power is generated. The protruding gear member 7452e is extended to a position where this force and the urging force of the urging spring 7452f are balanced. In the overhanging state, the protruding gear member 7452e projects radially outward from the surface of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in which the tooth tips are connected (overhanging state).

Therefore, as will be described later, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2, the protruding gear member 7452e of the two-layer gear 7452 abuts on the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39). The layer gear 7452 begins to mesh with the reversing gear 7453.

That is, whether or not the two-layer gear 7452 starts to mesh with the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39) depending on whether the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is higher or lower than the boundary speed Vb. You can choose. Therefore, by changing the rotation speed V of the double-layer gear 7452 in the middle of rotation (by changing the moving speed of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40) in the middle of movement), the half-moon member 460 (see FIG. 40). A plurality of variations of the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the is rotated can be prepared.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 44, variations in the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the half moon member 460 starts to rotate will be described. First, a case where the main gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2 immediately after the start of movement of the moving member 420 from the retracted position (first speed pattern) will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41.

39 (a) to 39 (e) are rear views of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 showing the rotations of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 in chronological order. 40 (b), FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b) are front views of the combined operation unit 7400 showing the slide movement of the slide member 420 and the posture change of the half moon member 460 in chronological order. For ease of understanding, the gear teeth 452a and the disc portion 452c are omitted in FIG. 39, and the fastening plate portion 471 and the drive motor 472 are omitted in FIGS. 40 and 41.

It should be noted that FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), 39 (b) and 40 (b), 39 (c) and 41 (a), and 39 (d) and 41 (b). Are diagrams of substantially simultaneous points, and they correspond to each other. Further, in FIG. 39, the rotation direction of the two-layer gear 7452 is illustrated by an arrow, and as shown in FIG. 39, the arcuate recess 453c is circumscribed by a circle connecting the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452. It is formed in such a manner.

As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2 immediately after the start of movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40 (a)), and the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated by a predetermined amount. And the first protruding gear member 7452e1 are brought into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39B). As a result, the reversing gear 7453 begins to rotate, and the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture (see FIG. 40 (b)).

After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other to continue the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 and change the posture of the half moon member 460. Is continued (see FIGS. 39 (c) and 41 (a)).

After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, the double-layer gear 7452 is further rotated, so that the arcuate recess 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is re-engaged with the double-layer gear 7452. (See FIG. 39 (d)), the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the crescent member 460 with respect to the slide member 420 is fixed (see FIG. 41 (b)).

After that, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26 (b)), and the rotation is stopped when the slide member 420 is stopped (see FIG. 39 (e)). After that, the protruding gear member 7452e is moved inward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452 by the urging force of the urging spring 7452f.

Here, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated from the state of FIGS. 39 (d) to 39 (e), the third protruding member 7452e3 and the first protruding member 7452e1 hit the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d. There is a risk that the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 will come into contact with each other and mesh again.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, an arc-shaped chamfered portion 7453e is formed at one end (upper end in FIG. 39E) of the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d.

When the third protruding member 7452e3 and the first protruding member 7452e1 are brought into contact with the chamfered portion 7453e, a force acting inward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 7452 is applied to the third protruding member 7452e3 and the first protruding member 7452e1. As a result, the third protruding member 7452e3 and the first protruding member 7452e1 can be immersed in the third protruding member 7452e3 and the first protruding member 7452e1 before they mesh with the reversing gear 745. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 from meshing again.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotation speed V1 immediately after the start of movement of the moving member 420 from the retracted position, and the two-layer gear 7452 is second-rotated during the rotation. The case of being rotated at the speed V2 (the rotation speed V is changed) (second speed pattern) will be described.

42 (a) to 42 (e) are rear views of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 showing the rotations of the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 in chronological order. 43 (b), FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b) are front views of the combined operation unit 7400 showing the slide movement of the slide member 420 and the posture change of the half moon member 460 in chronological order. For ease of understanding, the gear teeth 452a and the disc portion 452c are omitted in FIG. 42, and the fastening plate portion 471 and the drive motor 472 are omitted in FIGS. 43 and 44.

It should be noted that FIG. 42 (a) and the above-mentioned FIGS. 40 (a), 42 (b) and 43 (a), 42 (c) and 43 (b), 42 (d) and 44 (a). ), And FIGS. 42 (e) and 44 (b) are diagrams of substantially simultaneous points, and are in a corresponding relationship with each other. Further, in FIG. 42, the rotation direction of the two-layer gear 7452 is illustrated by an arrow, and as shown in FIG. 42 (a), the arcuate recess 453c is a circle in which the tooth tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 7452 are connected. It is formed in a manner circumscribing to.

As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the first rotation speed V1 immediately after the start of movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40 (a)), so that the protruding gear member 7452e is immersed. Form.

Therefore, even if the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is not brought into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453, so that the mesh between the two-layer gear 7452 and the reversing gear 7453 is not good. It does not start (see FIG. 42 (b)). As a result, the slide member 420 is moved while maintaining the posture of the half-moon member 460 (see FIG. 43 (a)).

The rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 is changed to the second rotation speed V2 until the two-layer gear 7452 continues to rotate and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 approaches the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453. Will be done. As a result, the protruding gear member 7452e forms an overhanging state (see FIG. 42C), and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 is brought into contact with the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d to rotate the reversing gear 7453. At the same time, the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture (see FIG. 43 (b)).

After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other to continue the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 and change the posture of the half moon member 460. Is continued (see FIGS. 42 (d) and 44 (a)).

After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 7452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, the double-layer gear 7452 is further rotated, so that the arcuate recess 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is re-engaged with the double-layer gear 7452. (See FIG. 42 (e)), the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the crescent member 460 with respect to the slide member 420 is fixed (see FIG. 44 (b)).

After that, the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26B), and the rotation is stopped when the slide member 420 is stopped.

Since the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 and the moving speed of the slide member 420 are in a proportional relationship, it is easy to change the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 by changing the rotation speed of the drive motor 472. Can be done.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the position of the slide member 420 is changed in at least two ways when the half moon member 460 starts to rotate while the slide member 420 is slid from the retracted position to the overhanging position. be able to. That is, as compared with the case where the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the second rotation speed V2 from the start of rotation (see FIGS. 39 to 41), the first rotation speed V1 is changed to the second rotation speed V2 during the rotation. When it is changed (see FIGS. 42 to 44), the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the half moon member 460 rotates can be moved toward the center side (center side in the vertical direction) (FIGS. 40 (b) and FIG. 43 (b)). As a result, the variation of the production can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, typical examples of the above-mentioned first speed pattern and second speed pattern will be described. FIG. 45 is a graph showing the speed change of the two-layer gear 7452. In FIG. 45, the horizontal axis indicates the position (P) of the slide member 420 between the retracted position (P = 0) and the overhanging position (P = Pmax), and the vertical axis represents the slide of the slide member 420. The rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 that is rotated during movement is shown.

On the horizontal axis of FIG. 45, the first position P1 means the position where the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is first arranged to face the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39B), and the second position P2 is , The position where the second protruding gear member 7452e2 is first arranged to face the reversing gear 7453 (FIG. 42 (c). The solid line shows the above-mentioned first speed pattern, and the broken line shows the above-mentioned second speed pattern. Shown.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated in the first speed pattern, the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the first position P1. On the other hand, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated in the second speed pattern, the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the second position P2.

That is, by changing the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 during the slide movement of the slide member 420, the position of the slide member 420 when the posture of the half-moon member 460 begins to change can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the effects of the slide member 420 and the half moon member 460.

Next, the combined operation unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the position of the slide member 420 when the half moon member 460 rotates is changed by changing the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 in the middle of rotation has been described, but in the eighth embodiment, The composite operation unit 8400 is formed so that the position of the slide member 420 when the half moon member 460 rotates can be changed while the rotation speed of the two-layer gear 8452 is maintained at a constant speed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

46 (a) and 46 (b) are rear views of the two-layer gear 8452. Note that FIG. 46 (a) shows a state in which the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at a separate rotation speed V3, and FIG. 46 (b) shows a state in which the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at a joint rotation speed V4. Will be done. Since the stationary state in which the rotation of the two-layer gear 8452 is stopped is the same as in FIG. 38 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

For ease of understanding, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are not shown. This also applies to the subsequent drawings. Further, the separated rotation speed V3 means a rotation speed in which the first protruding gear member 7452e1 forms an immersive state, while the second protruding gear member 7452e2 forms an overhanging state, and the joint rotation speed V4 is the first. 1 It means the rotational speed at which the protruding gear member 7452e1 and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 both form an overhanging state.

As shown in FIG. 46A, when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separated rotation speed V3, each protruding gear member 7452e is moved outward in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 8452 with a different overhang amount. (At least the second protruding gear member 7452e2 has a larger amount of movement than the first protruding gear member 7452e1).

In the present embodiment, the spring constants of the urging springs 8452f that connect the protruding gear members 7452e and the rotating shafts of the two-layer gears 7452 are formed differently. That is, the spring constant of the first urging spring 8452f1 that connects the first protruding gear member 7452e1 and the rotating shaft of the two-layer gear 8452 is the second that connects the second protruding gear member 7452e2 and the rotating shaft of the two-layer gear 8452. 2 It is made larger than the spring constant of the urging spring 8452f2. The spring constant of the third urging spring 8452f3 is made larger than the spring constant of the first urging spring 8452f1.

As shown in FIG. 46A, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the separated rotation speed V3, the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is positioned on the rotation axis side of the surface of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in which the tooth tips are connected. (Immersion state), the second protruding gear member 7452e2 projects radially outward from the surface of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 where the tooth tips are connected (overhanging state).

Therefore, as will be described later, when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separated rotation speed V3, the two-layer gear 8452 does not start meshing with the reversing gear 7453 in the first protruding gear member 7452e1, and the second protruding gear The member 7452e2 meshes with the reversing gear 7453.

As shown in FIG. 46B, when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the joint rotation speed V4, a force is generated to move the protruding gear member 7452e to the outside in the radial direction of the two-layer gear 8452. The protruding gear member 7452e is extended to a position where this force and the urging force of the urging spring 8452f are balanced. In the overhanging state, at least the first protruding gear member 7452e1 and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 project radially outward from the surface of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 in which the tooth tips are connected (overhanging state).

Therefore, when the double-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the joint rotation speed V4, the first protruding gear member 7452e1 of the protruding gear member 7452e of the double-layer gear 8452 abuts on the reversing gear 7453, so that the double-layer gear 7452 Begins to be meshed with the reversing gear 7453.

Since the operations of the two-layer gear 8452, the reversing gear 7453, and the slide member 420 when the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at a constant speed of the joint rotation speed V4 are the same as the operations shown in FIGS. 39 to 41. The explanation is omitted.

47 (a) to 47 (e) are rear views of the double-layer gear 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 showing the rotations of the double-layer gear 8452 and the reverse gear 7453 in chronological order. In the description of FIG. 47, FIGS. 40, 43 and 44 are appropriately referred to, and in FIG. 47, the gear teeth 452a and the disk portion 452c are omitted for ease of understanding.

It should be noted that FIG. 47 (a) and the above-mentioned FIGS. 40 (a), 47 (b) and 43 (a), 47 (c) and 43 (b), 47 (d) and 44 (a). ), And FIGS. 47 (e) and 44 (b) are diagrams of substantially simultaneous points, and are in a corresponding relationship with each other. Further, in FIG. 47, the rotation directions of the two-layer gear 8452 and the reversing gear 7453 are illustrated by arrows, and as shown in FIG. 47, the arcuate recess 453c connects the tips of the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the two-layer gear 8452. It is formed in a manner circumscribing a circle.

As shown in FIG. 47 (a), since the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at the separation rotation speed V3 immediately after the start of movement of the slide member 420 (see FIG. 40 (a)), the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is immersed. The second protruding gear member 7452e2 forms an overhanging state.

Therefore, even if the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated by a predetermined amount, the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is not brought into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 7453, so that the mesh between the two-layer gear 8452 and the reversing gear 7453 is It does not start (see FIG. 47 (b)). As a result, the slide member 420 is moved while maintaining the posture of the half-moon member 460 (see FIG. 43 (a)).

The two-layer gear 8452 continues to rotate at the separated rotation speed V3, and the second protruding gear member 7452e2 comes into contact with the engaging projectile receiving portion 453d, so that the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate and the half moon member 460 is in the posture. It begins to change (see FIG. 43 (b)).

After the reversing gear 7453 starts to rotate, the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 8452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other to continue the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 and change the posture of the half moon member 460. Is continued (see FIGS. 47 (d) and 44 (a)).

After the intermediate gear teeth 452b2 of the double-layer gear 8452 and the intermediate gear teeth 453b2 of the reversing gear 7453 mesh with each other, the double-layer gear 8452 is further rotated, so that the arcuate recess 453c of the reversing gear 7453 is re-engaged with the double-layer gear 8452. (See FIG. 47 (e)), the rotation of the reversing gear 7453 is stopped, and the posture of the half moon member 460 is fixed (see FIG. 44 (b)).

After that, the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated until the slide member 420 finishes sliding (see FIG. 26B), and the rotation is stopped when the slide member 420 is stopped.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the position of the slide member 420 is changed in at least two ways when the half moon member 460 starts to rotate while the slide member 420 is slid from the retracted position to the overhanging position. Therefore, the speed change during the slide movement of the slide member 420 is not required.

That is, compared to the case where the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at a constant speed at the joint rotation speed V4 (see FIGS. 40 and 41), the case where the two-layer gear 8452 is rotated at a constant speed at a separate rotation speed V3 (FIG. 43). And FIG. 44), the arrangement of the slide member 420 when the half moon member 460 is rotated can be moved toward the center side (center side in the vertical direction) (see FIGS. 40 (b) and 43 (b)). As a result, the variation of the production can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the above-mentioned separated rotation speed V3 and joint rotation speed V4 will be described as a graph. FIG. 48 is a graph showing the rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452. In FIG. 48, the horizontal axis indicates the position (P) of the slide member 420 between the retracted position (P = 0) and the overhanging position (P = Pmax), and the vertical axis represents the slide member 420. The rotation speed V of the two-layer gear 7452 that is rotated during the slide movement of the above is shown.

On the horizontal axis of FIG. 48, the first position P1 means the position where the first protruding gear member 7452e1 is first arranged to face the reversing gear 7453 (see FIG. 39B), and the second position P2 is , The position where the second protruding gear member 7452e2 is first arranged to face the reversing gear 7453 (meaning FIG. 42C).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the joint rotation speed V4, the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the first position P1. On the other hand, when the two-layer gear 7452 is rotated at the separation rotation speed V3, the half-moon member 460 begins to change its posture immediately after the slide member 420 reaches the second position P2.

That is, if two types of slide movement speeds of the slide member 420 are set, the slide member 420 when the posture of the half moon member 460 starts to change without changing the slide movement speed of the slide member 420 during movement. The position of can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the effects of the slide member 420 and the half moon member 460.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the claw member 463 of the half-moon member 460 moves due to the movement of the slide rack 442 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a locking pin is arranged in a rotation locus in which the drive lever 467 is rotated by rotating the half moon member 460, and the drive lever 467 is dammed by the locking pin to form the half moon member 460 and the drive lever. A rotation angle difference may occur between the two, and the claw member 463 may be moved. In this case, the rotation of the half-moon member 460 and the movement of the claw member 463 can be linked.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the cutout portion 422d of the slide member 420 is formed in an arc shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be cut out in a rectangular shape in a direction away from the drive gear 473. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the notch portion 422d can be improved, and the material required for the slide member 420 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the shape in which the tooth tips of the drive gear 473 are connected is substantially circular has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive gear 473 may be divided into four in the circumferential direction, and the tooth depth of the gear teeth may be different for each of the divided parts. In this case, by attaching the drive gear 473 toward the transmitted leg portion 422 with the portion of the gear tooth having a short tooth gap, the size required for the notch portion 422d of the transmitted leg portion 422 to pass the drive gear 473 is increased. Can be reduced. On the other hand, it is possible to secure the transmission of the driving force to the transmitted leg portion 422 at the portion where the gear teeth have a long tooth gap. In addition, in the above-mentioned divided portion, there may be a portion where gear teeth are not formed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the drive gear 473 is attached / detached through the notch portions 422d formed in the pair of transmitted leg portions 422 arranged to face each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cutout portion 422d may not be formed in the transmitted leg portion 422, and the transmitted leg portion 422 may be formed so as to be movable in a direction away from each other (a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction). In this case, the drive gear 473 cannot be removed when the pair of transmitted legs 422 are arranged close to each other, while the drive gear 473 is removable when the pair of transmitted legs 422 are arranged at a distance. can do.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the embedding member 5452h formed of the magnetic material is embedded in the embedding hole 5452g of the two-layer gear 5452 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the periphery of the starting gear teeth 5452b1 of the two-layer gear 5452 may be covered with a magnetic material. As a result, since the magnetic material can be arranged on the outside of the starting gear tooth 5452b1, the distance between the reversing gear 5453 and the magnetic material can be shortened, and the two-layer gear 5452 and the reversing gear 5453 act at the start of meshing. The magnetic force can be made stronger.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the embedding hole 5453f is formed in the starting gear tooth 5453b1 of the reversing gear 5453 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the embedding hole 5453f may be formed in a manner in which the engaging projecting receiving portion 453d is bored and the embedding member 5453g is embedded. In this case, the embedded members 5452h and 5453g are embedded so that the magnetic force of the embedded member 5453g and the magnetic force of the embedded member 5452h embedded in the two-layer gear 5452 repel each other, thereby reversing with the two-layer gear 5452. The impact at the time of contact of the gear 5453 can be alleviated. That is, before the starting gear tooth 5452b1 of the two-layer gear 5452 is brought into contact with the engaging projectile receiving portion 453d of the reversing gear 5453, the reversing gear 5453 is rotated in a direction away from the starting gear tooth 5452b1 by the repulsive magnetic force. Can be done. Therefore, the durability of the starting gear tooth 5452b1 can be improved.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the masses of the protruding gear members 7452e are equal has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, each protruding gear member 7452e may be formed with a different mass, and the spring constant of the urging spring 7452f for urging the protruding gear member 7452e having a larger mass may be formed to be larger. As a result, the difference in how the protruding gear member 7452e is projected depending on the magnitude of the mass can be alleviated by the magnitude of the urging force of the urging spring 7452f.

In the seventh and eighth embodiments, the protruding gear member 7452e of the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 is movably formed so that the timing of contact between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reversing gear 7453 can be changed. However, this is not always the case. For example, the reversing gear 7453 may be formed so as to be movable in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452. In this case, the reversing gear 7453 can be separated from the two-layer gears 7452, 8452 to form a state in which they are not in contact with each other, while the reversing gear 7453 can be brought into contact with the two-layer gears 7452, 8452. Can be. Therefore, even when the movable protruding gear member 7452e is not required, the timing of contact between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reversing gear 7453 can be changed.

In the seventh and eighth embodiments, the protruding gear member 7452e of the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 is movably formed so that the timing of contact between the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 and the reversing gear 7453 can be changed. However, this is not always the case. For example, the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 may be able to form a first state in which the reversing gear 7453 and the transmission gear 451 are not meshed with each other and a second state in which the reversing gear 7453 and the transmission gear 451 are meshed with each other. In this case, the driving force is not transmitted to the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 in the first state, while the driving force can be transmitted to the two-layer gears 7452 and 8452 in the second state. Therefore, even when the movable protruding gear member 7452e is not required, the timing at which the reversing gear 7453 starts operating can be changed.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the masses of the protruding gear members 7452e are equal and the spring constants of the urging springs 8452f are different has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the spring constants of the urging springs 8452f may be the same, and the masses of the protruding gear members 7452e may be different. Thereby, the overhang amount of each protruding gear member 7452e can be adjusted more easily than adjusting the spring constant.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the drive gear 473 is pivotally supported by the drive shaft of the drive motor 472 at one point has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of pins are projected from the ends of the shaft support members fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 472, and a plurality of fitting portions are formed in which the plurality of pins are fitted to the rotating body portion of the drive gear 473. The shaft support member and the drive gear 473 may be engaged with each other at a plurality of points. In this case, the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor 472 and the drive gear 473 can be maintained by the pins being caught by the drive gear 473 in the rotational direction, so that the drive gear 473 and the plurality of pins are loosely fitted. can do.

As a result, the force required to separate the drive motor 472 and the rotating body portion of the drive gear 473 can be reduced, so that the front side wall portion 422c of the transmitted leg portion 422 is deformed or the drive motor 472 is subjected to excessive stress. It is possible to prevent it from being added.

<First control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 121. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in each of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted. In this control example, unlike the above-described embodiments in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed at the time of a big hit, the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened and closed at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this control example, the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is configured to be opened and closed at the time of a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened or not depending on the big hit type. Whether or not the entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened or closed may be changed, or may be changed for each round in one big hit. As a result, the variation of the game is increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

First, the specific winning device 650 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 52. FIG. 49A is a front perspective view of the specific winning device 650, and FIG. 49B is a rear perspective view of the specific winning device 650. Further, FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled specific winning device 650, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the disassembled specific winning device 650. Further, FIG. 52 is a front view and a side sectional view of the specific winning device 650. Note that FIG. 52 shows a state in which the front cover body 651 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b), the specific winning device 650 includes a front cover body 651, a base member 652, and a back cover body 655. The front cover body 651 and the back cover body 655 are fastened with screws from the back side of the base member 652, respectively, the front cover body 651 is on the front side of the base member 652, and the back cover body 655 is on the back side of the base member 652. It is fitted to be. As a result, a region where the game ball can flow down is formed inside the specific winning device 650. Further, the base member 652 is attached to the game board 13 in a state of being inserted into the opening hole machined by the router. As a result, the specific winning device 650 is attached to the game board 13.

Although the details will be described later, a plurality of sensors for detecting that the game ball has flowed down are provided inside the specific winning device 650, and based on the detection results of these sensors, the effect during the jackpot game is produced. Is configured to change.

The details of the specific winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the specific winning device 650 disassembled into a front cover body 651, a base member 652, and a back cover body 655. FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the specific winning device 650 disassembled in the same manner as in FIG. 50. 52 (a) is a front view of the specific winning device 650 with the front cover removed, and FIG. 52 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LIIb-LIIB of FIG. 52 (a). Is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LIIc-LIIc of FIG. 52 (a).

The front cover body 651 includes a front cover and an outer wall portion erected from the outer edge thereof, and is formed of a light-transmitting material in a box shape with one side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 50) open. Further, an opening having a width that allows the game ball to flow down is provided in the upper right side and the central part on the left side of the outer wall portion. As a result, when the front cover body 651 and the base member 652 are fitted together, the opening on the upper right side becomes the entrance portion 651a through which the game ball can flow into the inside of the specific winning device 650, and the opening on the center on the left side becomes. The game ball inside the specific winning device 650 serves as an outlet portion 652c that can flow down to the outside. Further, a guide wall is formed from the opening on the upper right side to the center, and the game ball that has entered the entrance portion 651a is configured to be guided to the first specific winning opening 650a, which will be described later. An inlet sensor 900a is provided at the entrance portion 651a, and an outlet sensor 900c is provided at the outlet portion 652c so that a game ball that has passed through each can be detected.

A second winning opening is provided in the upper part of the base member 652, a first specific winning opening 650a is formed in the lower right part, and a second specific winning opening 650b is formed in the lower left part so as to project to the front and back sides. ing. A first ball sensor 652a and a second ball sensor 652b are arranged above the first specific winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b, respectively, and the ball entering each specific winning opening is detected. Will be done. A ball entry control plate 654 that can slide in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 is provided above the first ball entry sensor 652a and the second ball entry sensor 652b. By sliding the ball entry control plate, the game ball can be changed into a state in which the game ball can enter the first specific winning opening 650a or the second specific winning opening 650b, and a state in which the ball cannot enter.

A detour flow path 653 is provided near the upper portion of the ball entry control plate 654 and between the first specific winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b. The game ball that has entered the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650 first flows down above the first specific winning opening 650a and before the detour flow path 653. Here, when the ball entry control plate 654 is open (sliding to the back), the game ball enters the first specific winning opening 650a, while the ball entry control plate 654 is closed. (Sliding toward you), the game ball will flow down to the detour flow path 653. A detour sensor 900b is provided at the upstream entrance portion 653a of the detour flow path 653 so that a passing game ball can be detected.

The game ball that has flowed down the detour flow path 653 will flow down to the upper side of the second specific winning opening 650b and before the exit portion 652c. Here, when the ball entry control plate 654 is open (sliding to the back), the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650b, while the ball entry control plate 654 is closed. (Sliding toward you), the game ball will flow down from the exit portion 652c to the outside of the specific winning device 650.

Here, in both the first specific winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b, prize balls (game balls) are paid out based on the winning. That is, even if the game ball enters the specific winning opening 650 at the timing when the entry control plate 654 is closed and does not enter the first specific winning opening 650a, it enters after passing through the detour flow path 653. If the ball regulation plate 654 is opened at the timing, the ball will be entered into the second specific winning opening 650b, and the prize ball will be paid out based on the winning. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the payout of the prize ball based on the game ball that has entered the specific prize device 650.

The detour flow path 653 is formed on the front side and the back side of the base member 652 so that the game ball meanders and flows down. As a result, the length of the path flowing down the detour flow path can be lengthened as compared with the case where the game ball flows down without meandering, so that the time for the game ball to flow down the detour flow path can be lengthened. Therefore, even if the timing of opening the ball entry control plate 654 is late, the game ball that has passed through the detour flow path 653 can enter the second specific winning opening 650b.

Although the details will be described later, by determining the opening / closing pattern of the entry control plate 654 according to the time when the game ball passes through the detour route 653, the game ball passing through the detour flow path 653 is the second specific winning opening 650b. An opening / closing pattern that makes it easy to enter the ball and an opening / closing pattern that makes it difficult to enter the ball can be defined. Further, if the route length of the detour route 653 is configured to be adjustable, it is possible to adjust whether or not the game ball passing through the detour route 653 can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650b. The time for passing the detour route 653 is not limited to the route length, and may be adjusted by changing the friction coefficient of the road surface on which the game ball flows (for example, using a non-slip material).

A protrusion 652d is formed on the upper portion of the second winning opening 640, and electric accessory 640a is arranged on the left and right sides. As a result, the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 640 is possible only when the electric accessory 640a is open. Not limited to this, the ball may be entered into the second winning opening 640 even when the electric accessory 640a is not opened without forming the protrusion 652d.

The back cover body 655 is formed with a discharge flow path through which the game balls that have entered the second winning opening 640, the first specific winning opening 650a, and the second specific winning opening 650b flow down, and the electric accessory 640a. A solenoid 645 for an electric accessory for driving the ball and a variable solenoid 670 for changing the ball entry control plate 654 are provided.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 53 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 53B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of numbers from "0" to "9". In addition, each main symbol may be displayed with a symbol or the like attached with a number.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are aligned. Further, in the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned. Although details will be described later, in this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, there is a SW effect or a background change effect that suggests (notices) that there is a high possibility that the special symbol will be a big hit. In that case, the display area where the variable display is performed may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 53 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the jackpot symbols are aligned on the effective line L1 (in this control example, the same combination of main symbols), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first winning opening 64, and the small area Ds2 and Ds3 is an area for displaying a preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this control example, a boy with a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice will be produced by issuing it.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In this control example, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, the opening / closing pattern of the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 and the ball entry timing of the game ball will be described. FIG. 54 is a schematic view schematically showing the ball entry timing in the opening / closing operation of the ball entry control plate 654. The upper part of FIG. 54 shows the open / closed state of the ball entry control plate 654, and the middle part shows the timing when the launched game ball enters the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650. The lower part shows the timing at which the game ball that has flowed down into the detour flow path without entering the first specific winning opening 650a finishes flowing down the detour flow path.

The timing at which the ball entry control plate 654 is open is the timing at which the launched game ball enters the first specific winning opening 650a (first ball entry timing). On the other hand, the timing when the ball entry restriction version 654 is closed is the timing when the launched game ball does not enter the first specific winning opening 650a, and the game ball flowing down the detour flow path 653 is the second specific winning opening 650b. There is a timing of entering the ball (second entry timing) and a timing of flowing down from the exit portion 652c to the outside without entering the second specific winning opening 650b (exit passage timing).

The second entry timing and the exit passage timing are determined by whether or not the entry control plate 654 is opened at the timing when the game ball finishes flowing down the detour route 653. In FIG. 54, the second ball entry timing is set after the lapse of the first ball entry timing, and the game ball launched at this timing does not enter the first specific winning opening 650a and passes through the detour flow path 653. It will flow down. After that, when the game ball finishes flowing down the detour flow path 653, the ball entry control plate 654 is opened, so that the game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650b. On the other hand, at the exit passage timing after the second entry timing has elapsed, when the game ball finishes flowing down the detour flow path 653, the entry control plate 654 is not the timing to open (that is, it is closed), so that the game ball is closed. Does not enter the second specific winning opening 650b, but passes through the exit portion 652c.

In this way, whether or not the game ball that has not entered the first specific winning opening 650a wins the second specific winning opening 650b can be determined by the opening / closing timing of the winning regulation plate 654.

Next, the opening / closing pattern of the winning control plate 654 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an opening / closing pattern A in which a game ball that has not entered the first specific winning opening 650a easily wins a prize in the second specific winning opening 650b. b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an opening / closing pattern B in which a game ball that has not entered the first specific winning opening 650a is unlikely to enter the second specific winning opening 650b.

Details will be described later, but this opening / closing pattern is selected based on the jackpot type. In this control example, the opening / closing pattern is configured to be selected based on the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be selected regardless of the jackpot type. As a result, even with the same jackpot type, the opening / closing pattern changes the game value that the player can acquire, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Since the upper, middle, and lower stages of FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b) show the same timing as in FIG. 54, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the opening / closing pattern A shown in FIG. 55 (a), one out of every two game balls fired at regular intervals is entered when the winning regulation plate 654 is open, and the other ball is winning. When the regulation plate 654 is closed, it is opened and closed so as to enter the ball. Here, as shown in the figure, the detoured game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650b because the winning regulation plate 654 is in the open state when it finishes flowing down the detour flow path 653.

On the other hand, in the opening / closing pattern B shown in FIG. 55 (b), one out of every two game balls fired at regular intervals enters the specific winning device 650 at the timing when the winning regulation plate 654 is open. Is similar. However, compared to the opening / closing pattern A, the timing at which the entry control plate 654 is opened for the second time is earlier, and the timing at which the first ball of the detoured game ball finishes flowing down the detour flow path 653 is as shown in the figure. Since the ball control plate 654 is in the closed state, the ball does not enter the second specific winning opening 650b. Therefore, as compared with the opening / closing pattern A, the opening / closing pattern B is an opening / closing pattern in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening.

The opening / closing timing of the ball entry control plate 654 may be appropriately set without being limited to the opening / closing pattern described above. For example, all the game balls that did not enter the first specific winning opening 650a may be set to enter the second specific winning opening 650b, or all the balls may enter the second specific winning opening 650b. It may be set not to (that is, all pass through the outlet portion 652c). Further, the opening / closing timing of the ball entry control plate 654 is appropriately set according to the shape and total length of the detour flow path (the time required for the game ball to pass).

Further, a plurality of detour routes having different times for the game balls to pass may be provided so that the game balls that have not entered the first specific winning opening 650a can be distributed to those detour routes. For example, a detour route in which a game ball that has not entered the first specific winning opening 650a can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650b and a detour route in which the ball is difficult to enter may be provided. As a result, even if the opening / closing pattern is the same, the ease of entering the ball can be changed, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, in this control example, in order to regulate the entry of balls into the first specific winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b, one entry control plate 654 is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. A ball entry control plate that regulates the entry of the ball may be provided individually. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of restricting the entry of balls into each specific winning opening, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this control example, the ball entry control plate 654 in the specific winning device 650 regulates the entry of balls into the first specific winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b, which are a part of the specific winning opening. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the first specific winning opening 650a or the second specific winning opening 650b, a second winning opening 640 may be provided, or a general winning opening 63 or the like may be provided. May be good.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59, the detection results of various sensors provided inside the specific winning device 650 and the effect display during the jackpot game based on the detection results will be described. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the detection timings of various sensors and the contents of the effect display based on the detection results. Further, FIGS. 57 to 59 are schematic views illustrating the contents of each effect display.

When the first game ball enters the specific winning device 650 after the start of the jackpot game, the entry is detected by the entrance sensor 900a (when the first ball entrance sensor in FIG. 56 is detected). As a result, the effect based on the first game ball (the first ball effect in FIG. 56) is started, and the appearance effect is displayed (see FIG. 57 (a)). The effect screen in this case is a normal effect screen displayed on one screen as shown at the bottom.

Next, when the entry of the second and third balls is detected by the entrance sensor 900a during the display of the appearance effect (when the second ball entrance sensor is detected and when the third ball entrance sensor is detected in FIG. 56). The effects based on the second and third game balls (second ball effect and third ball effect in FIG. 56) are started, and the number of appearing effects is displayed based on the respective detection results. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), a cat pattern indicating the number of cats appearing is displayed in the lower right part due to the effect of the number of cats appearing. The number of cats appearing indicates the number of pending productions, and when the production based on the first game ball is completed, the number of cats appearing is reduced by 1 and the production based on the second game ball is executed. Will be done.

When the detour sensor 900b detects that the first game ball has passed the detour entrance portion 653a of the detour flow path 653 without entering the first specific winning opening 650a (when the detour sensor is detected in FIG. 56). ), The effect based on the first game ball is changed from the appearance effect to the escape effect (see FIG. 57 (b)). The effect screen in this case is a special effect screen displayed on two screens as shown at the bottom. With this special effect screen, an effect based on the first game ball (escape effect) can be displayed on the left side of the screen, and an effect based on the second game ball (appearance effect) can be displayed on the right side of the screen. (See FIG. 57 (b)).

After that, when the second game ball enters the first specific winning opening 650a and is detected by the first ball sensor 652a, the appearance effect based on the second game ball on the right side of the screen goes to the capture effect. (See FIG. 58 (a)). When this capture effect is completed, the appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed on the right side of the screen.

Next, when the second ball entry sensor 652b detects that the first game ball has finished flowing down the detour flow path 653 and has entered the second specific winning opening 650b, the game of the first ball on the left side of the screen. The escape effect based on the ball is changed to the recapturing effect (see FIG. 58 (b)). When this recapturing effect is completed, there is no effect displayed on the left side of the screen, so the effect screen becomes a normal effect screen displayed on one screen as shown in the bottom row, and an appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the exit sensor 900c detects that the first game ball has finished flowing down the detour flow path 653 and has passed through the exit portion 652c without entering the second specific winning opening 650b, 1 on the left side of the screen. The escape effect based on the game ball of the ball is changed to the capture failure effect (see FIG. 59 (a)). When this capture failure effect is completed, the effect displayed on the left side of the screen disappears as in FIG. 58 (b) described above, so that the appearance effect based on the third game ball is displayed as the normal effect screen. ..

Here, a case where the capture effect is executed on the normal effect screen will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (b). FIG. 59 (b) is an effect display displayed when the first game ball enters the first specific winning opening 650a when the above-mentioned FIG. 57 (a) is displayed. As described above, when there is a game ball flowing down the detour flow path 653 and a game ball between the entrance portion 651a and the detour flow path 653, a special effect screen is used to produce an effect based on each game ball. It is visible at the same time. On the other hand, when there is a game ball in only one of them, the effect based on the corresponding game ball is displayed on the normal effect screen.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the display contents of the accessory interlocking effect will be described. 60 and 61 are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and the first spherical accessory 330 and the second spherical accessory 340.

The character-linked effect is an effect executed during the variable display. When this accessory interlocking effect is executed, the variable display during execution is reduced and displayed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 60 (a). Further, the first spherical accessory 330 and the second spherical accessory 340 are lit, and a pattern (PUSH pattern) surrounding the characters PUSH in a circle is displayed on the upper right and upper left of the screen (see FIG. 60 (a)). .. The PUSH pattern displayed on the upper left is moved to the lower right, and the PUSH pattern displayed on the upper right is moved to the lower left (FIG. 60 (b)).

Then, the two PUSH patterns are moved so as to overlap each other in the center of the screen (see FIG. 61 (a)), and at the timing when the two PUSH patterns completely overlap each other, the first spherical accessory 330 and the second spherical role The object 340 is turned off, and a gauge indicating the remaining time for pressing the button is displayed at the lower right of the screen (see FIG. 61 (b)). Here, the first spherical accessory 330 and the second spherical accessory include the first spherical cover bodies (330a, 330b) and the second spherical cover bodies (340a, 340b), respectively, and the first spherical accessory At the timing when the object 330 and the second spherical accessory 340 are turned off, the object 330 and the second spherical accessory 340 are moved to a position covering the front surface portion of the spherical accessory. These spherical covers are moved by a first accessory motor 330c and a second accessory motor 340c (not shown).

Next, the background interlocking effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 63. 62 to 63 are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the background interlocking effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this control example, a display suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen as a part of the background display. Specifically, the background levels of "level 1", "level 2", "level 3", and "level 4" are displayed in the upper right part of the third symbol display device 81. The background level of "level 1" is a display suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is the lowest, and the background level of "level 4" is a display suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is the highest. This background level is changed during the change display or at the start of the change, and is changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the background change lottery process (see FIG. 92). A detailed description will be described later.

Here, a case where the background level is changed during the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. 62. When the background level is "level 1", the symbols in the left and right columns of the variable display are stopped, and the characters "continuation level 2" are displayed in the center (see FIG. 62 (a)). After that, the variable display is restarted and the background level is changed to "level 2" (see FIG. 62 (b)). Here, the case where the background level is changed from "level 1" to "level 2" has been described, but there are cases where "level 1" is changed to "level 3" or "level 4" during the variable display of 1. is there.

Next, a case where the background level is changed at the start of the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. 63. In FIG. 62 (b) described above, the variable display is stopped after the background level is changed to “level 2” (see FIG. 63 (a)). After that, the next variable display is started, the text "Level up!" Is displayed at the top of the screen, and the background level is changed to "Level 3".

As described above, in this control example, it is possible to change the background level during the variation display of 1 as described with reference to FIG. 62, and as described with reference to FIG. 63, the changed background level is displayed with subsequent variation. It can be used continuously even in. As a result, even in the variable display after the variable display of 1, the display with a high expectation of a big hit can be continuously made in a state of a high expectation of a big hit. Can be improved.

Although the description is omitted in this control example, in a game machine, usually, when a special symbol is changed, characters and comments indicating various jackpot expectations are displayed, and an effect such as voice is executed. In such a configuration, since the notice display modes showing various different expectations are displayed, the player does not know which expectation to look at to judge the expectation for the jackpot, and the notice display showing the expectation There is a problem that you lose interest or you cannot understand the contents of the notice and get bored of the game early. However, in this control example, since the background level is displayed as the overall expectation on the background screen during the variable display of the special symbol, the game can be played with reference to the expectation. Therefore, the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, since the background level is changed each time the pseudo stop in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped is executed, it can be seen that the overall expectation has been changed from the expectation in the notice of the suspected stop. Can play games in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, the background level is changed by performing a pseudo stop, but the background level is changed based on the fact that a notice such as a character or a comment is displayed. It may be configured as follows. Furthermore, it is not limited to displaying the overall expectation at the background level, for example, the expectation is displayed by changing the color of the third symbol, or the character showing the overall expectation is always displayed. Then, the display mode of the character may be changed (for example, the pattern or color of clothes may be changed) to represent the overall expectation.

Further, in this control example, the background level is configured to be displayed by taking over not only the fluctuation but also when the fluctuation is stopped and the next fluctuation is started. With this configuration, the expectation of the number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped can be changed. Specifically, when the variation display of the special symbol is started with the background level of 3, the variation mode with high expectation for the jackpot is displayed by executing the temporary stop once. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to make the player always be aware of what the background level is and play the game.

Further, in this control example, the background level is used as the overall expectation when the pseudo stop is performed, but the variation display when the pseudo stop is not performed is based on the current mode state. It may be configured to display by level. In this case, by changing the background level, the table of the variation mode selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is switched. Specifically, the display of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without changing the fluctuation time notified from the main control device 110 and the rough display mode (reach, non-reach, etc.). The mode is configured to change (for example, in the background level 1, the display area is not divided into a variable mode of single display, and in the background level 2, the display area is divided into two, and the third symbol is independently displayed in each of them. In the variation pattern of the double display mode, the background level 3, the third symbol is similarly divided into three and the third symbol is variablely displayed in each of the three display modes). With this configuration, the background level display may indicate the degree of expectation depending on the content of the variation mode of the special symbol (whether or not the temporary stop is altered) and the variation pattern selection mode. You can switch.

Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the background level may be configured to be variable in frequency of increase and width of increase, frequency of decrease, width of decrease, etc. depending on the game state such as the normal game state and the probabilistic game state. .. Further, the higher the background level, the easier it is to select the variation pattern in which the pseudo stop (temporary stop) is executed. On the contrary, the lower the background level, the easier it is to execute the pseudo stop. Further, a background level is set in advance for the variable pattern to be displayed in a variable manner, and when the variable pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the background level may be set to the set background level.

<About the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 64 to 76. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, and is the same as each control example described above. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device (not shown), and a third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the setting of the display in is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like include a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device (not shown), and a third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to set the display in.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 86). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203j set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 holding ball corresponding to winning in the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) is stored. Areas 203a are provided, and in each of these areas, a random number counter C1 per first and a type counter C2 per first are matched according to the timing of entering the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. And each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is usually used in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the start port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 86).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the RAM 203 is generated at the timing when the sphere wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number that is the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this first random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the probability is high, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a for the high probability of the special symbol and the first random number table 202a for the low probability of the special symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 (FIG. 66). reference).

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, it is determined in the special symbol lottery whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is any of "0 to 9". , "0-9", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined to be a big hit.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the ball wins the left first winning opening 64a or the right first winning opening 64b. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first hit random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is added to the first hit random number table for the low probability. It is stored. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/400".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbol, and the values "0 to 9" are stored in the first random number table for the high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/40".

In this control example, the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the low probability time and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first hit random number table for the high probability time. So, the random number values that are the jackpots for each are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in this control example, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the random number value is any of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B". In this control example, the number of types of jackpots is two, but the type is not limited to one, and two or more types may be provided. Further, even if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is the same, a different jackpot type is selected between the jackpot based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64 and the jackpot based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. It may be configured to be. With this configuration, for example, when a jackpot is based on a ball entering the second winning opening 640, the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player can be easily selected, so that the second winning opening 640 can be easily selected. It is possible to make the player expect a jackpot based on entering the ball. Here, the second winning opening 640 is a winning opening that makes it easier to enter the ball in the time-saving game state described later. Therefore, when the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the player can be in a more advantageous state, and the player's interest can be improved.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at a symbol other than the reach symbol. (For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely off" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur, two stop (effect) patterns are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the RAM 203 reaches the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first winning opening 64, which is for low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely off".

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 86) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 67A), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202d, for example, "disengagement (for a long time)", "disengagement (for a short time)", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot A, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table 202d, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type). The fluctuation pattern table 222a is also set in the voice lamp control device 113, and the fluctuation pattern table 222a has more detailed fluctuation pattern contents corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output by the main control device 110. Will be selected.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In this control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the random number table (not shown) per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the random number counter C4 per second is the normal symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and for the high probability of hitting the normal symbol (for the normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 66 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are 24 random values that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5-28". These random numbers are stored in a random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. It runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) As a result, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the passage port 645 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the passage port 645 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time And the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Run for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) A symbol of "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, it is attached to the second winning opening 640. Since the opening period of the electric accessory is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits. However, the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device can be executed.

Next, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is provided with a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data.

FIG. 65A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first hit random number table 202a, a first hit type selection table 202b, a second hit random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. ..

As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 66A) is a table in which the values of random numbers that serve as jackpots for special symbols are defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, the first random number table 202a includes a table for determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability (first random number table 202a for a low probability) and a high special symbol. There is a table (first random number table 202a for high probability) for determining whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol at the time of probability, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each table is different. There is. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66B) is set so that the jackpot A and the jackpot B can be selected respectively. Specifically, the value "0 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the jackpot A, and "50 to 99" is set as the determination value of the jackpot B.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 66C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 66 (c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is judged to be a hit of a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed. The electric accessory attached to the passage port 645 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

The variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 67A) is a data table used for determining the display mode of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 67 (b)) and the off (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 67 (c)). At least the deviation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 67 (d)) is specified. Although not shown, a variation pattern table or the like in a time-saving game state is set in addition to this.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (b). FIG. 67B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (fluctuation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set respectively. For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

Specifically, for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", and for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds). ), Each of "180 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 hits the fluctuation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. Select from the variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 67 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d2 for detachment (normal). The deviation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, as described above, the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", the complete deviation is set, and if the value is in the range of "80 to 99", the deviation reach is set.

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as a determination value, and for a long deviation (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

In addition, for the off-reach, "0-149" is for various out-of-normal reach (30 seconds), and "150-197" is for various out-of-order super reach (60 seconds). "198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

As described above, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the normal game state, the stop type is determined and the variation acquired from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 67 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation). The deviation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is out of alignment when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 differs from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above in that the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is set.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete deviation is determined. , If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-reach is determined.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching is set lower when it is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming long at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels bored because the game is delayed in the probabilistic game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. FIG. 65B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main control device. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 64, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 86) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (see FIG. 85) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 84) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a probability variation flag 203e. It has at least a time saving and medium counter 203f and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first winning opening 64 or Each value of the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on winning the second winning opening 640 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data are four. Among the vacant areas of the hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. Then, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) Is vacant, and the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning of balls (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation display (variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S404 in FIG. 80). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 78).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 78 and S405 in FIG. 80). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d increases the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device based on the passage of the ball at the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter to count. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S704 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 82).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved sphere counter 203d (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (see S705 in FIG. 83). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S703: FIG. 83: No).

The probability change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is the probability change game state (probability change game state). When the probability variation flag 203e is set to on, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, and when it is off, it indicates that it is a low probability gaming state (including the time saving gaming state). In this control example, when it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON (see S1114 in FIG. 87). Then, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started (see S1102 in FIG. 87). In the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power outage occurs, the state immediately before the power outage is backed up.

The time-saving medium counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of changes of the remaining special symbols in the time-saving gaming state. When it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot) at the end of the jackpot game, the time-saving medium counter 203f is set to 100. That is, in this control example, if the probabilistic game state is not set after the big hit game, the game shifts to the time-saving game state of 100 times.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

Next, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus as described above. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, other devices 228, a first accessory motor 330c, a second accessory motor 340c, and an inlet. The center 900a, the detour sensor 900b, the exit sensor 900c, and the like are connected to each other (see FIG. 4).

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the rear image of this control example includes a display (level display) that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (a). As shown in FIG. 68A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a variable pattern selection table 222a, an accessory interlocking effect table 222b, an opening / closing pattern storage area 222c, a background lottery table 222d, and a SW scenario storage area 222e. In addition, various data and programs necessary for controlling the game are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (disengagement, reach deviation, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

The accessory interlocking effect table 222b is a table that defines an operation pattern of the spherical accessory (330, 340) and an effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for executing the above-mentioned accessory interlocking effect. Is. By setting the operation of the spherical accessory and the display effect based on this table, it is possible to execute the accessory interlocking effect in which the operation of the spherical accessory and the display effect are linked. The detailed contents of the accessory-linked effect table 222b will be described later with reference to FIG. 69 (a).

The opening / closing pattern storage area 222c defines the relationship between the opening / closing pattern of the ball entry restriction plate 653 of the specific winning device 650 and the jackpot type during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the case of the jackpot A, the opening / closing pattern A is selected, and in the case of the jackpot B, the opening / closing pattern B is selected. As described above, the jackpot A is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B in that it is in a probabilistic state. Further, as described above, the opening / closing pattern A is more advantageous to the player than the opening / closing pattern B in that the game ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650b. Therefore, since the opening / closing pattern A is selected by the jackpot A, the jackpot A becomes a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player executes the game with the expectation that the jackpot A will be higher, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Not limited to the above, the opening / closing pattern B may be selected in the case of the jackpot A, and the opening / closing pattern A may be selected in the case of the jackpot B. Further, the selection of the opening / closing pattern does not have to be based on the jackpot type, and may be selected based on, for example, the value of the effect counter 223j described later. As a result, even if the jackpot type is the same, whether or not it is advantageous for the player changes depending on the opening / closing pattern selected, so that the player is interested in both the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Further, the opening / closing pattern may be selected based on the jackpot type and the effect counter described above, the jackpot type and the opening / closing pattern may be further increased, and for example, the jackpot type C and the opening / closing pattern C may be increased. ..

The background lottery table 222d defines the background level to be shifted based on the winning / failing determination result, the current background level, and the value of the effect counter 223j described later. Based on this table, the background level can be changed in the background change lottery process (see FIG. 92). The details of the background lottery table 222d will be described later with reference to FIG. 69 (b).

The SW scenario storage area 222e is an area that stores the SW scenario that defines the period during which the pressing of the SW is effective in the above-mentioned accessory interlocking effect. By controlling the lighting operation of the spherical accessory (330, 340) and the frame button 22 based on this SW scenario, the effect content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 113 and the spherical accessory (330, 340) and the lighting operation of the frame button 22 can be linked to produce the effect.

Here, the frame button 22 is lit during the SW validity period based on the SW scenario. By turning on the frame button 22, it is possible to make the player recognize that the SW can be pressed.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (b). As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a jackpot valid flag 223e. , 1st entry flag 223f, 2nd entry flag 223g, remaining counter 223h, measurement counter 223i, effect counter 223j, open / close pattern storage area 223k, round flag 223m, exit timing counter 223n, SW scenario setting area 223o, continuous At least a background flag 223p, a background flag 223q, a power-off processing flag 223x, a power-off flag 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved spheres corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved sphere number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, or in the main control device 110, the variation in the special symbol. When the display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 90). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the number of hold balls corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved spheres on which the variable display is held.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1603 in FIG. 91), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2102 in FIG. 97). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 90), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2108 in FIG. 97). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The jackpot valid flag 223e is turned on when the first round of the jackpot game is started and the jackpot effect is enabled (see S1808 in FIG. 94), and is turned off 5 seconds after the jackpot game is completed. There is (see S1819 in FIG. 94). By turning on the jackpot effective flag 223e, the jackpot effect based on the detection results of various sensors arranged in the specific winning device 650 in the jackpot medium effect process (FIG. 98) (see FIGS. 57 to 59). Will be executed.

The first ball entry flag 223f is turned on when the first ball entry command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1903 in FIG. 95), and the process based on the reception of the first ball entry command is performed in the jackpot middle effect processing. It is turned off when executed (see 2211 in FIG. 98). The first ball entry command is a command transmitted when a game ball enters the first specific winning opening 650a by the first ball entry sensor 650a. When the first ball entry flag 223f is turned on, the voice lamp control device 113 issues a display capture command from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the detection result of the game ball by the first ball entry sensor 650a of the main control device 110. Can be sent to. Upon receiving the display capture command, the display control device 114 executes a process of displaying a capture effect (see FIG. 58 (a)) on the third symbol display device.

The second ball entry flag 223g is turned on when the second ball entry command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1905 in FIG. 95), and the process based on the reception of the second ball entry command is executed in the jackpot middle effect processing. If so, it is turned off (see S2214 in FIG. 98). The second ball entry command is a command transmitted when a game ball enters the second specific winning opening 650b by the second ball entry sensor 650b. When the second ball entry flag 223g is turned on, the voice lamp control device 113 issues a display recapturing command from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the detection result of the game ball by the second ball entry sensor 650b of the main control device 110. It can be transmitted to 114. Upon receiving the display recapturing command, the display control device 114 executes a process of displaying the recapturing effect (see FIG. 58B) on the third symbol display device.

The remaining counter 223h is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the execution of the ending effect in the jackpot effect, and is incremented by 1 each time the jackpot command process is executed after the ending effect is executed. There is (see S1816 in FIG. 94). Further, when the remaining counter reaches a value of 5 seconds or more in the jackpot command processing, it is reset (see S1818 in FIG. 94).

The measurement counter 223i is a counter for measuring the opening / closing timing of the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 opened / closed by the main control device 110, and when the above-mentioned jackpot valid flag 223e is on, that is, the jackpot. When the game is being executed, 1 is added each time the jackpot middle effect processing is executed (see S2202 in FIG. 98). Further, when the jackpot valid flag 223e described above is turned off, both are reset (see S1817 in FIG. 94). This measurement counter 223i is referred to together with the information on the opening / closing pattern storage area in the entrance passage processing (FIG. 99), and is used to determine which timing the game ball enters the specific winning device 650. (See S2303 in FIG. 99).

The effect counter 223j is a counter used for various lottery such as a character-linked effect and a background lottery, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 399. The effect counter 223j is updated one by one by the process of S1315 each time the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

The open / close pattern storage area 223k stores the information of the open / close pattern storage area 222c corresponding to the jackpot type when the opening command is received from the main control device 110 (S1802 in FIG. 94). As described above, the opening / closing pattern storage area 223k is referred to together with the measurement counter 223i in the entrance passage processing, and is used to determine which timing the game ball enters the specific winning device 650. (See S2303 in FIG. 99). In this control example, when the opening command, which is the timing when the jackpot starts, is received, the open / close pattern storage area is updated for clearing, but when the jackpot valid flag 223e is turned off, etc. In addition, you may try to clear it.

The in-round flag 223m is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game is in the round (the entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is being opened). This round in-round flag 223m is set to on when a round start command is received from the main controller 110 (S1806 in FIG. 94), and is set to off when a round end command is received from the main controller 110 (S1806 in FIG. 94). S1810 in FIG. 94).

The exit timing counter 223n counts the number of game balls whose timing of entering the specific winning device 650 during the round of the jackpot game is the exit passage timing. The exit timing counter 223n is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the passing timing is the exit timing in the entrance passing process executed when the ball entering the specific winning device 650 is detected (FIG. FIG. 99 S2305). Further, in the entrance passage process, when the jackpot game ends and the jackpot valid flag 223e described above is turned off, both are reset (S1817 in FIG. 94).

This exit timing counter is referred to in the entrance passage processing, and when the number of exit timing counters exceeds a predetermined number during the round of the jackpot game of the opening / closing pattern A in which the ball is easily entered into the second specific winning opening 650b (that is, the first 2 When there are more game balls passing through the exit portion 652c without entering the specific winning opening 650b), a display timing notification command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2307 in FIG. 99). .. Upon receiving the display timing notification command, the display control device 114 executes an effect display for changing the firing timing of the player. As a result, even though the opening / closing pattern A makes it easy to enter the second specific winning opening 650b, the player who launches the game ball at a timing when it is difficult to enter the second specific winning opening 650b is Since the firing timing can be changed, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage to the player.

The continuous background flag 223p has a background level that suggests the above-mentioned jackpot expectation before the variable display based on the jackpot is started when the winning command based on the jackpot start winning is received from the main controller 110. This is a flag for continuously changing (increasing) the level. This continuous background flag 223p is set to ON when the effect counter is "0 to 49" when it is determined that the jackpot command has been received in the winning command receiving process (see S1708 in FIG. 93). When the continuous background flag 223p is set to on, background change data is set for each reserved ball (see S1707 in FIG. 93). Therefore, in the background change lottery process executed thereafter, the continuous background flag 223p is referred to, and when it is on, the background change process is skipped (see S1601 in FIG. 92). The continuous background flag 223p is a flag that is automatically turned off at the start of the jackpot game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a winning command is received and the result is a big hit, the effect of continuously increasing the expectation of the background is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the case is out of order. It may be configured to run. In this case, by continuously changing the background in the case of an out-of-reach or an out-of-super reach, the degree of expectation for a larger hit can be maintained even when the fluctuation is started.

The background flag 223q stores the set background level when the background is changed in the background change lottery process (FIG. 92) or the variable display setting process (FIG. 97). This background flag 223q is referred to in the background change lottery process, and the process according to the current background level is executed (see S1604 in FIG. 92).

The power-off processing flag 223x sets the power-off flag 223y when the main control device 110 detects the power-off, a power-off command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command. It is set to on and the power off processing is executed (S1318 in FIG. 89). Then, when the power off processing is completed, the power off processing flag 223x is set to off (S1320 in FIG. 89). This power off processing flag 223x is referred to in the start-up process (see S1202 in FIG. 88), and when it is on, the power is turned off during the execution of the power off process (that is, the RAM is destroyed). It is determined that the RAM is destroyed, and the process when the RAM is destroyed is executed without checking the RAM destruction.

The power off flag 223y turns on the power off flag 223y when the main control device 110 detects a power outage, a power off command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command. It is set and the power off processing is executed (S1318 in FIG. 89). Then, in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 (FIG. 88), when the power off flag 223y is on, the work area of the RAM is cleared and the power off flag 223y is set to off (S1210 in FIG. 88). ).

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 90) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Here, the details of the accessory interlocking effect table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 69A. FIG. 69A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the accessory interlocking effect table 222b.

The accessory-linked effect table 222b defines an effect selected by the fluctuation pattern type and the value of the effect counter. Specifically, when the type of fluctuation pattern is "normal reach", SW effect A1 is selected if the effect counter is "0 to 199", and SW effect A2 is selected if the effect counter is "200 to 349". Is selected, and if the effect counter is "350 to 399", the SW effect A3 is selected. Further, when the type of the fluctuation pattern is "super reach", SW effect B1 is selected if the effect counter is "0 to 199", and SW effect B2 is selected if the effect counter is "200 to 349". If the effect counter is "350 to 399", the SW effect B3 is selected. Further, when the type of the fluctuation pattern is "special reach", the SW effect C1 is selected if the effect counter is "0 to 199", and the SW effect C2 is selected if the effect counter is "200 to 349". If the effect counter is "350 to 399", the SW effect C3 is selected.

Here, each fluctuation pattern type has a different fluctuation time set as described above. In this control example, the selected SW effect is changed according to the fluctuation pattern type. As a result, it is possible to select a SW effect with an appropriate effect time according to the fluctuation pattern.

Next, the details of the background lottery table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 69 (b). FIG. 69B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the background lottery table 222d.

The background lottery table 222d defines the background level of the transition destination based on the current background level and the effect counter 223j, and is defined so that the winning / failing determination result differs depending on whether the result is a hit or a miss.

Specifically, first, the case where the hit / fail judgment result is a hit will be described. When the hit / fail judgment result is a hit and the current background level is "level 1", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 199", the background level of the migration destination becomes "level 2" and " If it is "200", the background level of the migration destination is "level 4", and if it is "201-399", the background level is not changed. When the current background level is "level 2", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 19", the background level of the migration destination is "level 1", and if it is "20 to 159". If the background level of the migration destination is "level 3", if it is "200", the background level of the migration destination is "level 4", and if it is "201-399", the background level is not changed. Further, when the current background level is "level 3", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 29", the background level of the migration destination is "level 2", and it may be "30 to 139". For example, the background level of the migration destination is "level 4", and if it is "140 to 399", the background level is not changed. If the current background level is "level 4", the background level of the migration destination is "level 3" if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 39", and if it is "40 to 399". It is specified that the background level does not change.

Next, a case where the hit / fail determination result is incorrect will be described. When the pass / fail judgment result is incorrect and the current background level is "level 1", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 149", the background level of the migration destination becomes "level 2" and " If it is "150 to 399", the background level is not changed. If the current background level is "level 2", the background level of the migration destination is "level 1" if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 49", and if it is "50 to 99". It is stipulated that the background level of the migration destination is "level 3", and if it is "100 to 399", the background level is not changed. Further, when the current background level is "level 3", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 79", the background level of the migration destination is "level 2", and it may be "80 to 99". For example, the background level of the migration destination is "level 4", and if it is "100 to 399", the background level is not changed. Further, when the current background level is "level 4", if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 299", the background level of the migration destination is "level 3", and if it is "300 to 399". It is specified that the background level does not change.

In this way, if the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the background level is stipulated so that it is difficult to rise and fall, and if the hit / fail judgment result is not correct, the background level is stipulated to be difficult to rise and fall. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the background level, which indicates the degree of expectation of a big hit, from becoming frequently high even though the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since some models have exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 100) executed after the boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 101) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 76) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237, so that the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the third symbol at the time of power-on are turned on. An area 235d, a character symbol area 235e, and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is reached. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect when the incoming ball is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2403 and S2404 in FIG. 100).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 shows the power-on displayed by the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to be used as the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 72 (b). As shown in FIG. 72, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a “○” symbol at the lower right position facing the screen and a fluctuation image at power-on of the symbol and “○” as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the “x” symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 72 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 72 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 72 (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 73, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 73 is an explanatory view illustrating a rear image and a range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 73 (a) is an explanatory view showing a “city stage”. 73 (b) is shown with respect to the back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage” with respect to the back surface A corresponding to the above.

Of the back surfaces A and B, as shown in FIG. 73, the back image corresponding to the back surfaces A and B is a character whose image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is prepared in ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the stage to "city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 initially positions the display area between the first position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 73A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are recorded. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often performed without changing the stage while displaying the city stage, which is the initial stage, so all the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed city stage is displayed in the back image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 73B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage contains only a part of the back surface area, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, for the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the back image area 235c of.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing In order to change the back image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the back images, but doing so makes the resident video RAM 235 very much. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a', and the position is from the position a including the initial position. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the frame button by the player When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of 22, the initial position of the back surface B is immediately displayed as the third symbol by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed while scrolling or changing the color tone with the passage of time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from position b'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from position a to position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

On the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 70) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area by using the image data of the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 53) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball is entered into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, but the variation is caused in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the production is not started immediately.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki and the helmet Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

Next, the work RAM 233 provided in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j, a drawing target buffer flag 233k, an appearance effect flag 223m, an appearance counter 223n, an escape counter 223p, a capture counter 233r, a recapturing counter 223s, and other storage areas 223z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table and display data in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the ball entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. , The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and also notifies the player of the game value (the time saving period of the normal symbol) given to the player after the end of the jackpot, or the special symbol held. This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time saving period of the normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the through gate 67, so that the lottery of the normal symbol will be performed more often, and the chance of winning the normal symbol will also increase. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric accessory to be released as a big hit of a normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640, and a lottery for a special symbol becomes easier. Therefore, the longer the displayed normal symbol has a shorter time period, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, and the player can have it, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

Further, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal pattern, and the ball is the first winning opening. The easier it is to enter 64, the more prize balls. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, the number of balls held is difficult to decrease, or the number of balls held is not reduced. Therefore, the player is in a state where the number of balls held is difficult to decrease or the number of balls held is reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the player can perform the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that it will be a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will definitely be a big hit with a special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays either the back A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either the "city stage" or the "empty stage"), or the back different from the backs A and B. It contains information that specifies whether to display the image. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A and B, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that either the back surface A or the back surface A or B is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the rear image of the back surface A or B corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this control example, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type will be described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 14). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 76) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 75). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 75).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 75, in the example of FIG. In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 76) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 75, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 100) (see S2405 in FIG. 100). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S4905 in FIG. 120 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 36 ()), and the simple image is displayed. When the display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 102 (b)) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 102) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2709 in (b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 103 to 116) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 117 to 119) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see 2705 in FIG. 102 (b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 120 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 121) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 76), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 76) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 76) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing the image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 102 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S4505 in FIG. 117) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 76) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 76, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The MPU 231 is a display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Based on the image and the warning image notifying the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites by overwriting in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transferred data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 102 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4507 in FIG. 117). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2402 in FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 121) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S5013 in FIG. 121). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S5014 in FIG. 121). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5102 in FIG. 122).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 102 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S5102 of FIG. 122).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

Returning to FIG. 71, the description will be continued. The appearance effect during flag 233m is a flag indicating whether or not the above-mentioned appearance effect (see FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b)) is displayed during the jackpot game. The appearance effect flag 233m is set to ON in the appearance effect process (S3607 in FIG. 109) when a display appearance command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and the escape effect process (FIG. 110) or the capture effect process It is set to off in FIG. 112.

The appearing counter 233n is a counter indicating the above-mentioned appearance effect and the number of pending appearance effects (see FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b)). The appearing counter 233n is incremented by 1 when a display appearance command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S3608 in FIG. 109), and subtracted by 1 in the escape effect process (FIG. 110) or the capture effect process (FIG. 112). Will be done.

The escape counter 233n is a counter that indicates the above-mentioned escape effect and the number of pending escape effects (see FIGS. 57 (b), 58 (a), and (b)). The escape counter 233p is incremented by 1 when a display escape command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S3705 or S3707 in FIG. 110), and fails effect processing (FIG. 111) or recapturing effect process (FIG. 113). Is subtracted by 1.

The capture counter 233r is for counting the number of times the above-mentioned capture effect (see FIGS. 58 (a) and 59 (b)) is executed, that is, the number of game balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 650a. It is a counter. The capture counter 223r is incremented by 1 when a display capture command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 (see S3901 in FIG. 112), and is reset at the end of the jackpot game.

The recapturing counter 233s is a counter for counting the number of times the above-mentioned recapturing effect (see FIG. 58B) is executed, that is, the number of game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening 650b. The recapturing counter 233s is incremented by 1 when a display recapturing command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 (S4002 in FIG. 113), and is reset at the end of the jackpot game.

The other storage area 233z also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the voice lamp control device 113 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 103) of the display control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 77 to 87. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Although not shown, when the first ball entry sensor 652a detects the ball entering the first specific winning opening 650a in the specific winning device 650 in the process of S101, the first ball entry command is set. When the second ball entry sensor 652b detects the entry into the second specific winning opening 650b, the second entry command is set. The first ball entry command and the second ball entry command set here are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are external output processes (see FIG. 86) of the main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201. In S1001), it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 399, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 77), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 79.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 79. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (S211). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211: Yes), the jackpot data is set based on the jackpot type (S212).

Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S213), and the process proceeds to S216. When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the process of S217, it is determined that the jackpot has started in the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 86) (S1101: Yes). As a result, the opening command is set by the process of S1103, and the opening effect of notifying the start of the jackpot is executed. After the jackpot game is started, it is determined that the jackpot is being hit in the process of S1104 until the jackpot game is completed (S1104: Yes). After that, when the jackpot game ends, it is determined in the process of S1111 that it is the start timing of the ending effect, the ending command is set, and the probability change flag is turned on according to the jackpot type (S1114). , The time saving and medium counter will be set (S1115).

In the process of S211 if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S214), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1. If it is the above (S214: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S215), and the process proceeds to S216. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S214: No), the processing of S215 is skipped and the process proceeds to S216.

When the processing of S213, S214 or S215 is completed, the stop command is set (S216), and the main processing is terminated. The stop command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the stop command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of stopping the variable display being executed at the stop type received by the stop type command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 78) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). When the probability change flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, and when the value of the probability change flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol.

When the value of the probability change flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, so that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the high probability time Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values of these hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when the probability variation flag 203e is off (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, so that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 is used. , The lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (S304). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability one by one. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "0" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that becomes a hit of these match, the special symbol Judge that it is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the jackpots of the three types of special symbols (big hit A, Of the jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is a jackpot. It is determined that it is B (16R time saving jackpot) (see FIG. 66 (b)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. , "Shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are defined as the fluctuation patterns for both jackpot A and jackpot B, and "shared normal reach" is defined as the fluctuation pattern for both hit and miss. Various types, "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are stipulated.

In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 86). To. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, for convenience of explanation, first, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described, and then the look-ahead process (S407) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and starts winning. When there is, it is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of holdings N of the variation display in the special symbol) is set. Acquire (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the number of balls with special symbols reserved. If the value (N) of the counter 203c is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes). The value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area. Next, the look-ahead process of S407 described later is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the look-ahead process (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process (S407). This look-ahead process (S407) is executed in the above-mentioned start winning process (see FIG. 80), and pre-reading the lottery result in the special symbol is executed from the values indicated by various random number counters acquired based on the start winning. It is a process for.

In the look-ahead process (S407), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S501). If it is determined in the process of S501 that there is no new prize (S501: No), it is not necessary to execute the look-ahead process, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that there is a new prize (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state at the time when the fluctuation based on the prize is started is the probability change game state. (S502).

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is a probabilistic change (S502: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the above-mentioned start winning process (see FIG. 80) is used. , The lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 66A).

On the other hand, in the processing of S502, when it is determined that the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is not a probabilistic change (S502: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the above-mentioned start winning process (see FIG. 80). And the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 66A), the lottery result is acquired.

Since the method of acquiring the lottery result in the process of S503 or S504 is the same as the process of S303 or S304 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79) described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the processing of S503 or S504 is completed, the winning information command is set based on the lottery result (S505), and this processing is completed. The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. By receiving this winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result for the reserved ball before the start of fluctuation. As a result, the background interlocking effect described later can be suitably executed. The winning information command set here may include information such as a fluctuation pattern in addition to the lottery result. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation time and the fluctuation effect based on the reserved ball can be determined before the fluctuation starts.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 77), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor associated with the second winning opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Monaka and are included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S604 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is a big hit of a special symbol (S609). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In this control example, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is difficult to win. This means that during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning device 650. However, when the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is released, the ball that is to be won by the specific winning device 650 enters the second winning opening 640. Therefore, this is to prevent the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 from being opened so that the specific winning device 650 can easily win a prize. Since the specific winning device 650 is provided immediately below the second winning opening 640, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second winning opening 640 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the second winning opening Many balls enter the 640. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the second winning opening 640 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired by the processing of S607. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 66 (c)).

In the process of S608, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 66 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is missed. , The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so that the second winning opening 640 The opening period of the electric accessory associated with the above is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. It is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the variation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the opening period of the electric accessory is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 86) is executed next. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 86) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), determines whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and if the sphere has passed, the second hit. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved sphere number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S703). : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d The value (M) is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this control example) is executed in order to wait for the control devices on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S912 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 86, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 77), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 77) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 78) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 80) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 87) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the entry regulation plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 has elapsed, or the first specific winning opening 650a Alternatively, it is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have won a prize in the second specific winning opening 650b. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is closed. The opening and closing of the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 82), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In this control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79) ends, the first symbol display device The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 79) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 82), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 82), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 82) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 84 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 86), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the ball entry control plate 654 of the device 650.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the processing of S208 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 78) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the probability change flag 203e is turned off (S1102), the opening command is set (S1103), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1104). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1104, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1104: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1104, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (1104: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is opened (S1106), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1107). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is satisfied (S1108). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the ball entry restriction plate 654 of the specific winning device 650, or a ball is inserted into the first specific winning opening 650a and the second specific winning opening 650b. When a predetermined number (for example, 10 in total) is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1108, if the closing condition of the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is closed (S1109), and the round ends. A command is set (S1110) to end this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 is not satisfied (S1108: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1111). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

In the process of S1111, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1111: Yes), the ending command is set (S1112), and it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is the jackpot A (S1113). In the process of S1113, if it is determined that the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) was obtained (S1113: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON (S1114), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1113, if it is determined that the jackpot is B (16R time-saving jackpot) (S1113: No), 100 is set in the time-saving medium counter 203f (S1115), and this processing is terminated.

The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in the process of S1111, if it is not the ending start timing (S1111: No), this process ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 99. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1319 (see FIG. 89) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 89, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110 (see S1316 in FIG. 89), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S1319. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1319 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1319. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1319 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data shifts to S1208.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process in S1319, the voice lamp control device 113 It was started by resetting the MPU 221 of. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1319 is executed (see S1318 in FIG. 89). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1319 is executed, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1319 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S1209) in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the power cutoff flag 223y is set to off (S1210). After that, after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1211), interrupt enable is set (S1212), and then the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1208 is reached with the power supply cutoff flag 223y turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power supply is completely cut off, for example, and therefore S1208 via the processing of S1204 to S1206. This is the case when the process is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209 and S1210, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1211, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1211), and then interrupt is enabled. Is set (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clearing process of S1209 is skipped because when the processing of S1208 is reached via the processing of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1311. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S1302 to S1311 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1312 command determination process, S1313 variable display setting process, S1314 jackpot middle effect process, and S1315 counter value update process are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set. Details of this frame button input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 96.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), then the accessory operation process is executed (S1311), and the process proceeds to the process of S1312. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1310 is completed, the accessory operation processing is executed (S1311), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1312. In the accessory movement processing, the movement of the spherical accessory (330, 340) is performed based on the accessory movement data set in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 96) and the variable display setting process (FIG. 97). This is a process for controlling. Here, since the accessory movable data is set based on the SW scenario in the SW effect, the SW effect and the spherical accessory (330, 340) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. ) Can be linked with the operation.

In the process of S1312, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1312). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90.

Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed in the process of S1313 (S1313). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97.

Next, the jackpot middle effect processing is performed (S1314). The details of this jackpot effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 98.

When the processing of S1314 is completed, the effect counter 223j, which is a counter used for the above-mentioned character interlocking effect and the background level lottery, is updated (S1315). Specifically, the value of the effect counter 223j is read from the RAM 223, 1 is added to it, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the effect counter 223j is stored in the effect counter 223j.

When the processing of S1315 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1316). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1316 (S1316: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1318), and the power-off process is executed (S1319). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1320), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1316 (S1316: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1317), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1317: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1317: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1312). This command determination process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .. Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation pattern setting process is performed (S1402), then the background change lottery process is performed (S1403), and the process returns to the main process. Further, the details of the fluctuation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91, and the details of the background change lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 92.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1404). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1405), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1406), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 97) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1404: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1407). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1407: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol). The number of times of holding of the fluctuation display N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1408). Further, in the process of S1408, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1408 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the special value of the main control device 110 by the processing of S1408. It can be adjusted to the value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected or special. At the time of the symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1408 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1407, if the reserved ball number command is not received (S1407: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command is received from the main control device 110 (S1409). Then, when the winning command is received (S1409: Yes), the winning command process is executed (S1410), and the process returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), the main control device 110 acquires each value of each counter C1 to C3, and the value thereof is acquired. Each value of each of the acquired counters C1 to C3 is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Further, as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired in the main control device 110, the original lottery is performed from each value of each of the acquired counters C1 to C3 separately from the original big hit lottery of the special symbol. Various information obtained when is performed is pre-read (predicted). Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, a winning command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

In the winning command processing, various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by pre-reading in the main control device 110 is extracted as winning information from the received winning command, and the extracted winning information is stored in the winning information of RAM 223. Store in area 223a. Then, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the value of the effect counter 223j, with respect to the variable effect held at that time. Decide whether or not to perform a series of productions. The details of the winning command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 93.

In the process of S1409, if the winning command is not received (S1409: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot-related command is received from the main control device 110 (S1411). Then, when the jackpot-related command is received (S1411: Yes), the jackpot command process is executed (S1412), and the process returns to the main process. The details of this jackpot command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 94.

On the other hand, in the process of S1411, when the jackpot-related command is not received (S1411), then it is determined whether or not the first ball entry command or the second ball entry command is received (S1413). Then, when the first ball entry command or the second ball entry command is received (S1413: Yes), the jackpot winning process is executed (S1414), and the process returns to the main process. The details of this jackpot winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95.

On the other hand, in the process of S1413, if the first ball entry command or the second ball entry command is not received (S1413: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1415), and the main process is performed. Return. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, the variation pattern setting process (S1402) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 90) will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (see S1402). This variation pattern setting process (S1402) is a process executed when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. A variation pattern is selected based on the received command, and a necessary effect command (SW effect command) is selected. , Notice production command) is set.

In this fluctuation pattern setting process (S1402), first, the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1501), and the fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the received fluctuation pattern command (S1402). S1502). Next, it is determined whether or not the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern of the SW effect (S1503). If it is determined in the process of S1503 that the selected variation pattern is the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1503: Yes), the processes of S1504 to S1506 are executed in order to execute the SW effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1503, if it is determined that the selected variation pattern is not the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1503: No), it is not necessary to execute the SW effect, so the processes of S1504 to S1506 are skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S1507.

In the process of S1504, the SW effect is selected from the accessory interlocking effect table based on the fluctuation pattern selected by the process of S1502 and the effect counter 223j (S1504). Next, a display SW effect command indicating the SW effect selected by the process of S1504 is set (S1505), and a SW scenario is acquired from the SW scenario storage area 222e based on the SW effect selected by the process of S1504. The acquired SW scenario is stored in the SW scenario storage area 223o (S1506), and the process proceeds to S1507.

Here, the SW scenario sets a period in which the frame button 22 is effectively set according to the fluctuation period of the special symbol, a notice display content, a display content displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed, and the like. It is what has been done. This SW scenario is sequentially updated by the processing of S2002 in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307), and the updated scenario is set. As a result, when the updated and set scenario is the scenario in which the valid period of the frame button 22 is set, the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid. Further, in the SW scenario, movable data of spherical accessories 330 and 340 are also set, and the timing of moving the accessory is set so as to coincide with the start timing of the SW effective time.

In the process of S1507, the advance notice effect is selected (S1507), a display advance notice effect command indicating the selected advance notice effect is set (S1508), and this process is terminated. When the SW effect is selected, the advance notice effect may not be selected and the advance notice effect may not be executed. As a result, the SW effect and the advance notice effect are not executed at the same time, and the game machine can be easily understood by the player. Further, when the SW effect and the advance notice effect are executed at the same time, the expected degree of jackpot suggested by each may be the same or similar. As a result, for example, in the SW production, a production with a high degree of expectation is executed, while in the advance notice production, a production with a low degree of expectation is executed. can do.

Next, the background change extraction process (S1403) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 90) will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the background change lottery process (S1403).

In this background change lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous background flag 223q is on (S1601). When it is determined that the continuous background flag 223q is on (S1601: Yes), since the background change data has already been set for the reserved ball, the background change lottery is not performed and the process proceeds to S1602. .. In the process of S1602, it is determined whether or not the current background level is "level 4" (S1602). If it is determined that the current background level is "level 4" (S1602: Yes), it is not necessary to change the background level, so this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the current background level is not the background of "level 4" (S1602: No), the process proceeds to S1605.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, when it is determined that the continuous background flag 223q is off (S1601: No), the background change data is not set for the reserved ball, and the background change lottery is performed. The process proceeds to S1603. In the processing of S1603, it is determined whether or not the hit pseudo-variation is a one-time fluctuation pattern (1603), and if it is determined that the hit pseudo-variation is not a one-time fluctuation pattern (S1603: No), S1606 Move to the processing of. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit pseudo-variation is a one-time variation pattern (S1603: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current background level is level 2 or less (S1604).

If it is determined in the process of S1604 that the current background level is level 2 or less (S1604: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1605. Further, in the process of S1604, when it is determined that the current background level is level 3 or higher (S1604: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1606.

When the processing of S1602 or S1604 is completed, the background to which one level is added is set, and the process proceeds to the processing of S1609.

On the other hand, in the process of S1606 executed after the process of S1603 or S1604, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S1606), and the background lottery is performed from the background lottery table 222d based on the hit / fail determination result and the value of the effect counter 223j. Is executed (S1607). After that, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the background (S1608), if there is no change in the background (S1608: No), this process is terminated as it is, and if there is a change in the background (S1608: Yes), S1609. Move to processing.

In the process of S1609, the set background flag 223q is set to on (S1609), a display background change command indicating the set background is set (S1610), and this process is terminated. By setting this display background change command, the background is changed to the background set by the display control device 114.

Next, the winning command process (S1410) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the winning command processing (S1410). The winning command process (S1410) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1410 in FIG. 90), and when the winning command is received, it is continuously executed. It is determined whether or not to start the effect of changing the background.

In this winning command processing, first, the winning information based on the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 (S1701), and it is determined whether or not the continuous background flag 223p is on (S1702). If it is determined that the continuous background flag 223p is on (1702: Yes), this process ends as it is. When it is determined that the continuous background flag 223p is off (S1702: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit with other winning information (S1703). If it is determined that there is a hit in other prize information (S1703: Yes), it will be a big hit before the start prize based on the prize is executed, and the effect of continuously changing the background cannot be executed. To finish. If it is determined that there is no hit in the other winning information (S1703: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning / failing determination is a hit (S1704). If it is determined that the hit / fail judgment is not a hit (S1704: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the hit / fail judgment is correct (1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1705.

In the process of S1705, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223j is in the range of "0 to 49" (S1706), and the effect counter 223j is "0 to 49". If it is not in the range of (1706: No), this process is terminated as it is. In the processing of S1706, if the value of the effect counter 223j is in the range of "0 to 49" (S1706: Yes), background change data is set for each reserved ball (S1707), and then the continuous background flag 223p. Is set to on (S1708), and this process ends.

Next, the jackpot command process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the jackpot command processing (S1412). This jackpot command process (S1412) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1412 in FIG. 90), and when a jackpot-related command is received, it is executed. This is a process for determining the display mode of the ending effect.

In this control example, when the main control device 110 determines that the "special symbol jackpot" is completed, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state after the variation effect corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is completed. , The big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. The jackpot production is divided into three periods: a period in which the opening production is performed, a period in which the round production is performed, and a period in which the ending production is performed. When the jackpot effect is started, the opening effect is first performed, and the player is notified that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state. Next, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, the round effect is started, and each time a new round is started, the player is notified of the number of rounds this time. Then, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) is completed, the ending effect is finally performed, and the player is notified of the end of the special gaming state. In this control example, when this ending effect is performed, a definite effect display is displayed to notify that there is a start prize that is a "big hit of a special symbol" among the pending start prizes, or it is being executed. The time saving period display for notifying the time saving period of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is performed.

In the jackpot command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S1801). When it is determined that the opening command has been received in the processing of S1801 (S1801: Yes), the information on the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing pattern storage area 222c corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the opening / closing pattern storage area 223k (S1802). ), Set the display opening command (S1803), and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1801, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1801: No), it is determined whether or not the round start command has been received (S1804). If it is determined that the round start command has been received (S1804: Yes), the display round command is set (S1805), and the in-round flag 223m is set to ON (S1806). After that, it is determined whether or not the received command is the command of the first round (S1807). If it is determined that the current round is the first round (S1807: Yes), the jackpot valid flag 223e is set to ON (S1808), and this process ends. Further, in the process of S1807, even if it is determined that the current state is not the first round (S1807: No), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the process of S1804 that the round start command has not been received (S1804: No), it is determined whether or not the round end command has been received (S1809). If it is determined that the round end command has been received (S1809: Yes), the round 223m flag is set to off (S1810), and this process ends.

In the process of S1809, if it is determined that the round end command has not been received (S1809: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S1811). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S1811: Yes), the display ending command is set (S1812), 1 is added to the value of the remaining counter 223h (S1813), and this process ends.

In the process of S1811, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S1811: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining counter 223h is greater than 0 (S1814). If it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223h is 0 (S1814: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1814, when it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223h is 1 or more (S1814: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining counter 223h is equal to or more than the value indicating 5 seconds. (S1815). Specifically, since the remaining counter 223h is incremented by 1 each time the jackpot command process executed every 4 ms is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining counter 223h is 1250 or more. ..

In the process of S1815, if it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223h is less than the value indicating 5 seconds (S1815: No), it means that 5 seconds have not passed since the end of the jackpot game, so the remaining counter 1 is added to the value of 223h (S1816), and this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1815, when it is determined that the value of the remaining counter 223h is 5 seconds or more (S1815: Yes), it means that 5 seconds have passed since the end of the jackpot game, so that the measurement counter 223i is used. , The value of the timing change counter is reset (S1817), then the value of the remaining counter 223h is reset (S1818), the jackpot valid flag 223e is set to off (S1819), and this process is terminated.

Next, the jackpot winning process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the jackpot winning process (S1414). This jackpot winning process (S1414) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1414 in FIG. 90), and the first ball entry command from the main control device 110. Alternatively, it is a process executed when the second ball entry command is received.

In the jackpot winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot valid flag 223e is on (S1901). If it is determined in the process of S1901 that the jackpot valid flag 223e is off (S1901: No), the player enters the first specific winning opening 650a or the second specific winning opening 650b even though the jackpot game is not in progress. Since this is the case when there is a sphere, an error notification is performed (S1906), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1901 when it is determined that the jackpot valid flag 223e is on (S1901: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the first ball entry command has been received (S1902). In the process of S1902, if it is determined that the first ball entry command has been received (S1902: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the first specific winning opening 650a, so an effect based on the ball entry is performed. In order to execute the command, the first ball entry flag 223f is set to ON (S1903), and the process proceeds to S1904. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first ball entry command has not been received (S1902: No), the process of S1903 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1904.

After finishing the processing of S1902 or S1903, it is then determined whether or not the second ball entry command has been received (S1904). In the process of S1904, if it is determined that the second ball entry command has been received (S1904: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the second specific winning opening 650b. In order to execute the command, the second ball entry flag 223f is set to ON (S1905), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1904, if it is determined that the second ball entry command has not been received (S1904: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the SW scenario is set in the SW scenario setting area 223o (S2001). If it is determined that the SW scenario is not set (S2001: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW scenario is set (S2001: Yes), the SW scenario is updated (S2002), and the accessory movable data set in the updated scenario is set (S2003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the current SW valid period is (S2004), and if it is determined that the SW valid period is not (S2004: No), the process proceeds to S2007. On the other hand, in the process of S2004, when it is determined that the SW is valid period (S2004: No), it is determined whether or not the SW is pressed (S2005). If it is determined that the SW has been pressed (S2005: Yes), a display pressing command indicating SW pressing is set (S2006), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If it is determined in the process of S2005 that the SW is not pressed (S2005: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2007.

In the process of S2007, it is determined whether or not the updated SW scenario is the end data of the SW scenario (S2007). If it is determined that it is not the end data of the SW scenario (S2007: No), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that it is the end data of the SW scenario (S2007: Yes), the effect based on the SW scenario is produced. Since it is the end timing, the value of the SW scenario setting area 223o is reset (S2008), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the variation display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1313). This variation display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2101). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S2107 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S2102), and then selected in the processing of S1502 of the fluctuation pattern setting process (see FIG. 91). The variation pattern type in the variation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

Then, based on the selected variation pattern, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2104). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2105). In the process of S2105, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the accessory movable data is set based on the SW scenario in the SW scenario storage area (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2107. The accessory movable data set by the process of S2106 is referred to by the accessory motion process (S1311 in FIG. 89), and the motion and frame of the spherical accessory (330, 340) are based on the set accessory movable data. The lighting operation of the button 22 is set.

In the process of S2107, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2107). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2107: No), the stop type command is not received from the main controller 110, so this variation display Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S2107: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S2108), and then in the process of S1406 of the command determination process (see FIG. 90), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2109).

Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2110), and is displayed based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notifying the control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2111). By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 stops and displays the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a pseudo-variation fluctuation pattern (S2112), and if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not a pseudo-variation fluctuation pattern (S2112: No), the present process is terminated as it is. .. On the other hand, in the processing of S2112, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo fluctuation (S2112), the background flag 223q to which the background level corresponding to the number of pseudo fluctuations is added is set to ON (S2113). This process ends.

Here, when the pseudo fluctuation is performed, the background level is set to be raised by one in advance in the display data set in the display control device 114. As a result, it is not necessary to monitor the temporary stop timing in the pseudo-variation to raise (variate) the background level, and the processing load can be reduced.

Although the description is omitted in this control example, in a game machine, usually, when a special symbol is changed, characters and comments indicating various jackpot expectations are displayed, and an effect such as voice is executed. In such a configuration, since the notice display modes showing various different expectations are displayed, the player does not know which expectation to look at to judge the expectation for the jackpot, and the notice display showing the expectation There is a problem that you lose interest or you cannot understand the contents of the notice and get bored of the game early. However, in this control example, since the background level is displayed as the overall expectation on the background screen during the variable display of the special symbol, the game can be played with reference to the expectation. Therefore, the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, since the background level is changed each time the pseudo stop in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped is executed, it can be seen that the overall expectation has been changed from the expectation in the notice of the suspected stop. Can play games in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, the background level is changed by performing a pseudo stop, but the background level is changed based on the fact that a notice such as a character or a comment is displayed. It may be configured as follows. Furthermore, it is not limited to displaying the overall expectation at the background level, for example, the expectation is displayed by changing the color of the third symbol, or the character showing the overall expectation is always displayed. Then, the display mode of the character may be changed (for example, the pattern or color of clothes may be changed) to represent the overall expectation.

Further, in this control example, the background level is configured to be displayed by taking over not only the fluctuation but also when the fluctuation is stopped and the next fluctuation is started. With this configuration, the expectation of the number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped can be changed. Specifically, when the variation display of the special symbol is started with the background level of 3, the variation mode with high expectation for the jackpot is displayed by executing the temporary stop once. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to make the player always be aware of what the background level is and play the game.

Further, in this control example, the background level is used as the overall expectation when the pseudo stop is performed, but the variation display when the pseudo stop is not performed is based on the current mode state. It may be configured to display by level. In this case, by changing the background level, the table of the variation mode selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is switched. Specifically, the display of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without changing the fluctuation time notified from the main control device 110 and the rough display mode (reach, non-reach, etc.). The mode is configured to change (for example, in the background level 1, the display area is not divided into a variable mode of single display, and in the background level 2, the display area is divided into two, and the third symbol is independently displayed in each of them. In the variation pattern of the double display mode, the background level 3, the third symbol is similarly divided into three and the third symbol is variablely displayed in each of the three display modes). With this configuration, the background level display may indicate the degree of expectation depending on the content of the variation mode of the special symbol (whether or not the temporary stop is altered) and the variation pattern selection mode. You can switch.

Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the background level may be configured to be variable in frequency of increase and width of increase, frequency of decrease, width of decrease, etc. depending on the game state such as the normal game state and the probabilistic game state. .. Further, the higher the background level, the easier it is to select the variation pattern in which the pseudo stop (temporary stop) is executed. On the contrary, the lower the background level, the easier it is to execute the pseudo stop. Further, a background level is set in advance for the variable pattern to be displayed in a variable manner, and when the variable pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the background level may be set to the set background level.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the jackpot middle effect processing (S1314) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing this jackpot middle effect processing (S1314). This jackpot middle effect processing (S1314) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot middle effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot valid flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2201). If it is determined that the jackpot valid flag 223e is off (S2201: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot valid flag 223e is on (S2201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the measurement counter 223i (S2202) to determine whether or not the inlet sensor 900a is on. (S2203). If it is determined that the inlet sensor 900a is off (S2203: No), the processing of S2204 and S2205 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2206. On the other hand, in the processing of S2203, when it is determined that the entrance sensor 900a is ON (S2203: Yes), the entrance passage processing is executed (S2204), the appearance command for display is set (S2205), and the processing of S2206 is performed. Move to. The details of the entrance passage processing (S2204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 99.

In the process of S2206, it is determined whether or not the detour sensor 900b is on (S2206). If it is determined that the detour sensor 900b is off (S2206: No), the process of S2207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2208. On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when it is determined that the detour sensor 900b is on (S2206: Yes), a display escape command is set (S2207), and the process proceeds to the process of S2208.

In the process of S2208, it is determined whether or not the exit sensor 900c is on (S2208). If it is determined that the exit sensor 900c is off (S2208: No), the process of S2209 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2210. On the other hand, in the process of S2208, when it is determined that the exit sensor 900c is ON (S2208: Yes), a display failure command is set (S2209), and the process proceeds to S2210.

In the process of S2210, it is determined whether or not the first ball entry flag 223f is on (S2210). If it is determined that the first ball entry flag 223f is off (S2210: No), the processes of S2211 and S2212 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, in the process of S2210, when it is determined that the first entry flag 223f is on (S2210: Yes), the first entry flag 223f is set to off (S2211), and the display capture command is set. Then (S2212), the process proceeds to S2213.

In the process of S2213, it is determined whether or not the second entry flag 223g is on (S2213). If it is determined that the second ball entry flag 223g is off (S2213: No), the processes of S2214 and S2215 are skipped, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2213, when it is determined that the second entry flag 223g is on (S2213: Yes), the second entry flag 223g is set to off (S2214), and the display recapturing command is issued. Set (S2215) and end this process.

Next, the entrance passage process (S2204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this entrance passage processing (S2204). This entrance passage process (S2204) is executed in the jackpot medium effect process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the entrance passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the in-round flag 223m provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2301), and if it is determined that the in-round flag 223m is off (S2301: No), This process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2301, when it is determined that the flag 223m during the round is on (S2301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is A (S2302).

In the process of S2302, if it is determined that the jackpot type is not A (S2302: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is A (S2302: Yes), the passing timing is determined based on the information of the opening / closing pattern storage area 223k and the value of the measurement counter 223i (S2303).

Next, it is determined whether or not the passing timing is the exit passing timing (S2304). If it is determined that the passing timing is not the exit passing timing (S2304: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the passing timing is the exit passing timing (S2304: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the exit timing counter 223n (S2305), and then the value of the exit timing counter 223n is larger than 10. Whether or not it is determined (S2306).

If it is determined in the process of S2306 that the value of the exit timing counter 223n is 10 or less (S2306: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the exit timing counter 223n is larger than 10 (S2306: Yes), the display timing notification command is set (S2307), and then the value of the exit timing counter 223n is reset (S2308). , End this process.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 122. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 100, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, the NOR type ROM has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2401), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2401) will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2401) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND type flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads out and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2501). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2502). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2502, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2502, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2503). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2504), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2401 in FIG. 100) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 100) (S2505), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2401) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 101, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2501 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2502. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2503 to S2505 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2501 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2501. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S2502 and S2502, the processes of S2503 to S2505 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes S2503 to S2505 may be executed without performing the processes S2501 and S2502. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 100. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2402). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2403). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2403, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2404). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2404, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2405). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 120 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S4802 in FIG. 120 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 72 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)). The determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 102 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2709 in FIG. 102 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64, and the main control device 110 issued a voice lamp control device to instruct the start of the variation effect. When the display variation pattern command is received via 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 72 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, which is easy. It is possible to perform various fluctuation effects. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2405, interrupt permission is set (S2406), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2406, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (a). FIG. 102 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2601), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (b). FIG. 102 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 76) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2701: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. Therefore, it is not the image at power-on shown in FIG. 72, but a normal effect. The command determination process (S2702) is executed in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, and then the display setting process (S2703) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2702), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 to 116.

In the display setting process (S2703), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2702) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2704). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2703) or the simple display setting process (S2709). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2705). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2706). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2705), which are determined in the task process (S2704), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 76 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2707). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2707, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, complete off, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 72 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2708) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2709) is executed to display S2704. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 103 to 116, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2702), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 103, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2801), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2801: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2801: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (see FIG. 117) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2802), and then , The type of the command is analyzed for all the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area (S2803).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2804), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2804: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2805), the process returns to S2801.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2805) will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (a). FIG. 104 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2901).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2901 in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2901 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2901 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2903). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2903, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2904), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2905). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2906), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2905, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2902e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2904, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 103. In the processing of S2804, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2804: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2806). If there is a display variable type command (S2806: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2807), and the process returns to the process of S2801.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2807) will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (b). FIG. 104 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S3001), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S3002).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3002 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it to off (S3003) and end this process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3002 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (see S2704 in FIG. 102 (b)), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S3002 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3003. At the same time, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3001, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S3002.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2806, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2806: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot related command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2808). If there is a jackpot related command for display (S2808: Yes), the jackpot display process is executed (S2809), and the process returns to the process of S2801.

Here, the details of the jackpot display process (S2809) will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process. This jackpot display process executes a process corresponding to a jackpot-related command for display received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the jackpot display process (S2809), first, it is determined whether or not the display opening command has been received (S3101). If it is determined in the process of S3101 that the display opening command has been received (S3101: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S3102), and the process proceeds to the process of S3103. On the other hand, in the process of S3101, if it is determined that the display opening command has not been received (S3101: No), the process of S3102 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3103.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S3102) will be described with reference to FIG. 106 (a). FIG. 106 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process (S3102). This opening command process (S3102) executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the opening command processing (S3102), first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3201). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3202).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3201, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3203), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3201). S3204). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3205), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 105, the description will continue. When the processing of S3101 or S3102 is completed, it is determined whether or not the display round number command has been received (S3103). If it is determined in the process of S3103 that the display round number command has been received (S3103: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3104), and the process proceeds to the process of S3105. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3103 that the display round number command has not been received (S3103: No), the process of S3104 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3105.

Here, the round number command processing will be described with reference to FIG. 106 (b) (S3104). FIG. 106 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S3301). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3302).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3301, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3304). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3305), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 105, the description will continue. After finishing the processing of S3103 or S3104, it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3105). If there is a display ending command in the process of S3105 (S3105: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3106), and the process proceeds to the process of S3107. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3105 that there is no display ending command (S3105: No), the process of S3106 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3107.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S3106) will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S3401). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the processing of S3401 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag is turned on. The data table determination flag corresponding to the other ending display data table is set to off (S3403). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3403, which ending display mode the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to is supported. Can be easily determined.

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3404), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3404). S3405). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3406), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 105, the description will continue. After finishing the processing of S3105 or S3106, it is then determined whether or not there is a ball entry-related command among the unprocessed commands (S3107). If it is determined in the process of S3107 that there is a command related to ball entry (S3107: Yes), the ball entry effect process is executed (S3108), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no command related to ball entry (S3107: No), the process of S3108 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Here, the details of the ball entry effect processing (S3108) will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the ball entry effect processing (S3108). This ball entry effect process executes the process corresponding to the ball entry related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In this ball entry effect processing (S3108), first, it is determined whether or not a display appearance command has been received (S3501). If it is determined in the process of S3501 that the display appearance command has been received (S3501: Yes), the appearance effect process is executed (S3502), and the process proceeds to the process of S3503. Details of this appearance effect processing (S3502) will be described later with reference to FIG. 109. On the other hand, in the process of S3501, when it is determined that the display appearance command has not been received, the process of S3502 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3503.

After the processing of S3501 or S3502 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the display escape command has been received (S3503). If it is determined that the display escape command has been received in the process of S3503 (S3503: Yes), the escape effect process is executed (S3504), and the process proceeds to the process of S3505. The details of this escape effect processing (S3504) will be described later with reference to FIG. 110. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3503 that the display escape command has not been received (S3503: No), the process of S3504 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3505.

After finishing the processing of S3504 or S3505, it is then determined whether or not the display failure command has been received (S3505). If it is determined that the display failure command has been received in the process of S3505 (S3505: Yes), the failure effect process is executed (S3506), and the process proceeds to the process of S3507. For details of this failure effect processing (S3506). It will be described later with reference to FIG. 111. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3505 that the display failure command has not been received (S3505: No), the process of S3506 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3507.

After finishing the processing of S3505 or S3506, it is then determined whether or not the display capture command has been received (S3507). If it is determined that the display capture command has been received in the process of S3507 (S3507: Yes), the capture effect process is executed (S3508), and the process proceeds to the process of S3509. Details of this capture effect processing (S3508) will be described later with reference to FIG. 112. On the other hand, in the process of S3507, if it is determined that the display capture command has not been received (S3507: No), the process of S3508 is skipped. The process proceeds to S3509.

After finishing the processing of S3507 or S3508, it is then determined whether or not the display recapturing command has been received (S3509). If it is determined that the display recapture command has been received in the process of S3509 (S3509: Yes), the recapture effect process is executed (S3510), and this process ends. The details of this recapturing effect processing (S3510) will be described later with reference to FIG. 113. On the other hand, in the process of S3509, if it is determined that the display recapturing command has not been received (S3509: No), the process of S3510 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Here, the details of the appearance effect processing (S3502) will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the appearance effect processing (3102). This appearance effect processing (S3502) executes a process corresponding to the display appearance command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and the game ball enters the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game. It is a process for executing the effect when the effect is performed.

In the appearance production process (S3502), first, it is determined whether or not the appearance production flag 233m is on (S3601). If it is determined in the process of S3601 that the appearance effect is on (S3601), the appearance effect has already been executed (see FIG. 57 (a)), so the appearance counter 233n is added by 1 (see FIG. 57 (a)). S3602), the display data table corresponding to the value of the appearing counter 233n after the addition is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3603). When the process of S3603 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S3609. By the processing of S3602 and S3603, the number of cats in the number of cats appearing during the jackpot game (see FIGS. 57 to 59) is incremented by 1 and displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3601 when it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is off (S3601: No), then it is determined whether or not the escape counter 233p is larger than 0 (S3604). In the process of S3604, when it is determined that the escape counter 233p is 0 (S3604: No), it means that neither the appearance effect nor the escape effect is displayed, so that the normal appearance effect is supported. The display data table is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3605).

As described above, the normal appearance effect set by the process of S3605 is an effect in which the effect during the jackpot game is displayed on one screen, and when either the appearance effect or the escape effect is displayed. It is what is displayed. In this control example, as the effects during the jackpot game, two types of effects, an appearance effect and an escape effect, are configured so that the screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided into two and displayed at the same time. However, in the case where only one of the appearance effect and the escape effect needs to be displayed, only the appearance effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one screen by the normal appearance effect set by the process of S3605. Therefore, it is possible to make the game machine easy for the player to understand.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3604, when it is determined that the escape counter 233p is larger than 0 (S3604: Yes), the appearance effect is not displayed but the escape effect is displayed. Therefore, the special appearance effect is displayed. The display data table corresponding to the above is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3606). As a result, it is possible to switch from the state in which only the escape effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one screen to the state in which the appearance effect and the escape effect are displayed at the same time.

When the processing of S4705 or S4706 is completed, the appearance effect flag 233m is set to ON (S4707), the appearance counter 233n is added by 1 (S4708), and the process proceeds to S4709.

When the processing of S4703 or S4708 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3609). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the S display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3610), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3611). .. Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3612), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Next, the details of the escape effect processing (S3504) will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the escape effect processing (S3504). This escape effect process executes a process corresponding to the display escape command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game flows down to the detour flow path 653. It is a process for executing the effect when the effect is performed.

In the escape effect processing (S3504), first, the appearing counter 233n is subtracted by 1 (S3701), and it is determined whether or not the appearing counter 233n after the subtraction is 0 (S3702). In the processing of S3702, if it is determined that the appearing counter 233n is 0 (S3702: Yes), there is no appearance effect to be displayed, so the appearance effect flag 233m is set to off (S3703), and the process of S3704 Move to. On the other hand, in the process of S3702, when it is determined that the appearing counter 233n is not 0, there is an appearance effect to be displayed, so the process of S3703 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3704.

When the processing of S3702 or S3703 is completed, it is determined whether or not the escape counter 233p is larger than 0 (S3704). In the process of S3704, when it is determined that the escape counter 233p is larger than 0 (S3704: Yes), the escape counter 233p is added by 1 (S3705), and the value of the escape counter 233p after the addition is corresponded to. The display data table is determined, set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3706), and the process proceeds to S3711. By the processing of S3705 and S3706, the pattern of the cat (see FIGS. 57 to 59) is increased by 1 and displayed within the number of escapes displayed during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the process of S3704, when it is determined that the escape counter 233p is 0 (S3704: No), the escape counter 233p is added by 1 (S3707), and whether the appearance effect flag 233m is on. Whether or not it is determined (S3708). In the processing of S3708, if it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is off (S3708: No), there is no appearance effect to be displayed, so a display data table corresponding to the normal escape effect is determined and the display data is displayed. The table buffer is set to 233d (S3709), and the process proceeds to S3711.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3708, if it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S3708: Yes), there is an appearance effect to be displayed, so a display data table corresponding to the special escape effect is determined. The display data table buffer is set to 233d (S3710), and the process proceeds to S3711.

The above-mentioned normal escape effect is an effect of displaying the escape effect on one screen on the third symbol display device 81, and the special escape effect is an effect of displaying the escape effect and the appearance effect on two screens on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 57 (b)).

When the processing of S3706, S3709 or S3710 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3711). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3712), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3713). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3714), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Next, the details of the failure effect processing (S3506) will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the failure effect processing (S3506). This failure effect processing executes a process corresponding to the display failure command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game is the first specific winning opening 650a. This is a process for executing an effect when the ball passes through the exit portion 652c without entering any of the second specific winning openings 650b.

In the failure effect processing (S3506), first, the escape counter 223p is subtracted by 1 (S3801), and it is determined whether or not the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S3802). In the process of S3802, if it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is off (S3802: No), there is no appearance effect to be displayed. Therefore, a display data table corresponding to the normal failure effect is determined. , The display data table buffer is set to 233d (S3803), and the process proceeds to S3805. On the other hand, in the processing of S3802, if it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S3802: Yes), there is an appearance effect to be displayed, and the effect is displayed on two screens. The display data table corresponding to the effect is determined, the display data table buffer 233dn is set (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

When the processing of S3803 or S3804 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3805). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3806), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3807). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3808), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Next, the details of the capture effect processing (S3508) will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the capture effect processing (S3508). This capture effect process executes a process corresponding to the display capture command received from the voice lamp control process 113, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game is the first specific winning opening 650a. This is a process for executing the effect when the ball enters the ball.

In the capture effect processing (S3506), first, the capture counter 233r is added by 1 (S3901), and the appearing counter 233n is subtracted by 1 (S3902). Next, it is determined whether or not the appearing counter 233n subtracted by the process of S3902 is 0 (S3903). In the process of S3903, if it is determined that the appearance counter 233n is 0, there is no appearance effect to be displayed, so the appearance effect flag 233m is turned off (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3905. On the other hand, in the process of S3903, if it is determined that the appearing counter 233n is not 0 (S3903: No), there is an appearance effect to be displayed, so the process of S3904 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3905.

After finishing the processing of S3903 or S3904, it is then determined whether or not the escape counter 233p is larger than 0 (S3905). In the process of S3905, when it is determined that the escape counter 233p is 0 (S3905: No), there is no escape effect displayed and the capture counter is usually indicated in order to execute the capture effect on one screen. The display data table corresponding to the capture effect is determined, set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3906), and the process proceeds to S3908.

On the other hand, in the process of S3905, when it is determined that the escape counter 233p is larger than 0 (S3905: Yes), there is an escape effect displayed and the capture counter is set in order to execute the capture effect on two screens. The display data table corresponding to the special capture effect to be shown is determined, set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3907), and the process proceeds to S3908.

When the processing of S3906 or S3907 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3908). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3909), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3910). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S3911), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Next, the details of the recapturing effect processing (S3510) will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the recapturing effect processing (S3510). The recapture effect process 113 executes a process corresponding to the display recapture command received from the voice lamp control process 113, and the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 during the jackpot game is second specified. This is a process for executing the process when the ball enters the winning opening 650b.

In the recapturing effect processing (S3510), first, the escape counter 233p is subtracted by 1 (S4001), and the recapturing counter 233s is added by 1 (S4002). Next, it is determined whether or not the appearance production flag 233m is on (S4003). In the processing of S4003, when it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S4003: No), there is no appearance effect displayed and the recapture counter is executed in order to execute the recapture effect on one screen. The display data table corresponding to the normal recapturing effect indicating the above is determined, set in the display data table buffer (S4004), and the process proceeds to S4006.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4003, if it is determined that the appearance effect flag 233m is on (S4003: Yes), there is an appearance effect displayed and the recapture effect is executed on the two screens. The display data table corresponding to the special recapturing effect indicating the capture counter is determined, set in the display data table buffer (S4005), and the process proceeds to S4006.

When the processing of S4004 or S4005 is completed, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4006). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S4007), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4008). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S4009), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2808, if it is determined that there is no jackpot related command for display (S2808: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display timing notification command among the unprocessed commands (S2810). If there is a display timing notification command (S2810: Yes), the timing notification process is executed (S2811), and the process returns to the process of S2801.

Here, the details of the timing notification process (S2811) will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the timing notification process (S2811). This timing notification process (S2811) executes a process corresponding to the display timing notification command received from the voice lamp control device 113. This timing notification command is transmitted when the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 does not enter the second specific winning opening 650b and many game balls pass through the exit portion 652c as described above. is there.

In the timing notification process (S2811), first, the timing notification display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4101), and the transfer data table corresponding to the timing notification display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102). ). After that, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter based on the timing notification display data table (S4103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4104). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S4105), and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the timing notification display data table set here, an effect display for changing the launch timing of the game ball by the player is set. As a specific example, there is an effect of urging the screen and the frame button 22 to be pressed at the same time. In order to press the screen and the frame button 22 at the same time by this effect, the player needs to release the firing handle. Therefore, the launch timing of the game ball can be changed. By this effect, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the specific winning device 650 from being launched at a timing when it is difficult to enter the second specific winning opening 650b, and it is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display timing notification command in the processing of S2810 (S2810: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display background change command among the unprocessed commands (S2812). If there is a background change command for display (S2812: Yes), the background change command process is executed (S2813), and the process returns to the process of S2801.

Here, the details of the back surface change command processing (S2815) will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (a). FIG. 115A is a flowchart showing backside change command processing. This backside change command process executes the process corresponding to the backside change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S4803) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the on state is set to on (S4201). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back change command is turned on, and other back image types are turned on. The back image discrimination flag corresponding to is set to off (S4202), the back change command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command judgment processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S4201 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S4202. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S4202 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more backside change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more back change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly interpreted as a back change command. There is a possibility that it will be done. In the process of S4202, when it is determined that two or more backside change commands are stored in the command buffer area, the backside image discrimination flag corresponding to the backside image type indicated by the previously received backside change command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2812, if it is determined that there is no backside change command (S2812: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a advance notice effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2814), and the advance notice effect command is issued. If there is (S2814: Yes), the advance notice effect command process is executed (S2815), and the process returns to the process of S2801.

Here, the details of the advance notice effect command processing (S2815) will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect command processing (S2815). This notice effect command process (S2815) executes a process corresponding to the notice effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the advance notice effect command processing (S2815), first, it is determined whether or not the display SW effect command has been received (S4401). When it is determined that the display SW effect command has been received in the process of _S4401 (S4401: Yes), the SW effect display data table indicated by the received display SW effect command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4402). ), The process proceeds to S4403. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the display SW effect command has not been received (S4401: No), the process of S4402 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4403. By executing the process of S4402, the SW effect (FIGS. 60 and 61) in the above-mentioned accessory interlocking effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the effect pattern of the SW effect displayed by the process of S4402 is stored in the SW scenario setting area 223o in the RAM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the lighting and opening / closing operations of the spherical accessory (330, 340) whose operation is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113 and the lighting operation of the frame button 22 can be linked.

After finishing the processing of S4401 or S4402, it is then determined whether or not the display advance notice effect command has been received (S4403). If it is determined in the processing of S4403 that the display advance notice effect command has been received (S4403: Yes), the advance notice effect display data table indicated by the received display advance notice effect command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4404). ), The process proceeds to S4405. On the other hand, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that the display advance notice effect command has not been received (S4403: No), the process of S4404 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4405. The notice effect displayed by the process of S4404 is a notice effect that does not require the operation of the frame button 22, such as an effect in which a character appears.

After finishing the processing of S4403 or S4404, it is then determined whether or not the display pressing command has been received (S4405). If it is determined in the process of S4405 that a display pressing command has been received (S4405: Yes), the notice display data table corresponding to the set SW effect pressing effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4405: Yes). S4406), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4405, if it is determined that the display pressing command has not been received (S4405: No), the process of S4406 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2814, if it is determined that there is no advance notice command (S2814: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2816), and if there is an error command, (S2816: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S2817), and the process returns to the processing of S2801.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2817) will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (b). FIG. 115B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4301). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4302). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4301, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S4302 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S4302 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 103. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2816 (S2816: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2818), and the process returns to the process of S2801.

In the processing of S2801 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2801: Yes). ), The processing of S2802 to S2818 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2801 to S2818 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2801 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2709) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 72 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 104 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 104 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S2901. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2902, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2703), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 117, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4501), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4501: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S4502 to S4504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4505. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4501: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S4502), S4503 to S4504. Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S4503). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4503: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S4504).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S4601).

In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the warning image are specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4601, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S4602), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 117. After the warning image setting process (S4504) or in the process of S4503, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4503: No), then the process proceeds to the process of S4505.

In S4505, the pointer update process is executed (S4505). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4701). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Therefore, the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S4701, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S4702). As a result, if it is End information (S4702: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S4703), and if it is a demo display data table (S4703: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S4704), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4705), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S4703, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S4703: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S4703: No). S4706), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4702, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4702: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4506). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S4506 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4507), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4508). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4508: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counting counter 233h is 0 or less (S4508: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S4509).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S4509: Yes), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S4510), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4511). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the fixed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4512), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4513). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4514), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4515), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4515 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2704), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S4515, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4509, if the confirmation display flag is off instead of on (S4509: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S4516). If the demo display flag is off (S4516: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S4517) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4518). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4519). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4520), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S4521), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S4516, if the demo display flag is on (S4516: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2709) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. A process of setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, which specifies that the image (one of FIGS. 72B and 72C) is stopped and displayed, is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 and 120, the details of the transfer setting process (S2705) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 120A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4801). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4801: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S4802), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 120 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S4801 (S4801: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4803), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 120.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4802), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (b). FIG. 120 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4802).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S4901), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4901: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4902). In the process of S4902, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S4902 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4902: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4902: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4903. Further, as a result of the processing of S4901, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4901: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4903.

In the process of S4903, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4903), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4903: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4904), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S4903 (S4903: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4905), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 102 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 102 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2709 in FIG. 102 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 103 to 115) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 117 to 119) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set to draw the image. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 120) (see S4801: No in FIG. 120 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all the resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S4803), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4803).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4505) of the display setting process (S2703) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described at the indicated address (S5001). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S5002), and if it is the transfer data information (S5002: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S5003) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S5004), and the process proceeds to S5005.

Further, in the process of S5002, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S5002: No), the processes of S5003 and S5004 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5005. In the process of S5005, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S5005), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S5005: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S5006).

In the process of S5006, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S5006 that the transfer process has not been completed (S5006: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S5006: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S5007. Further, as a result of the processing of S5005, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S5005: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S5007.

In the process of S5007, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S5007), and if the transfer start flag is on (S5007: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S5008), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S5003 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S5017. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S5007: No), it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S5013). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S5009: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S5009: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S5010), the back image provided for each back image type. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S5011). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S5012), and the process proceeds to S5013.

In the process of S5013, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5013). The discrimination in the processing of S5013 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S5013, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5013: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S5013 (S5013: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S5014). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S5014, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S5015), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. The update of the stored image data discrimination flag 233j sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data to "on" as described above, and also sets the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the production at the time of the jackpot can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is among the image data used in the back image. Image data not stored in the area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2706), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2704) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the drawing list shown in FIG. 76 is generated (S5101). That is, in the processing of S5101, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2704). Then, the specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S5102). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands it by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the processing of S5102 (S5103). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 102 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<About the second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 132. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, when the SW effect is selected based on the fluctuation pattern, the spherical accessory (330, 340) and the SW effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are linked. The case of executing the character-linked production to be produced has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, when the SW effect is selected based on the fluctuation pattern, the case where the effect of pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times is executed will be described. Specifically, as the SW effect, a comment-type effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot based on the content of the comment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the background of the comment based on the pressing of the frame button 22, and the frame. Based on the pressing of the button 22, there is provided a continuous striking effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit depending on whether or not a specific pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The comment-type effect and the continuous hit-type effect can be switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially different. Further, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 is executed instead of the frame button input monitoring / effect process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the advance notice effect executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It differs in that a part of the command processing (S2815) is changed, and other various processing is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125, the display contents of the SW effect displayed in the second control example will be described. FIGS. 123A and 123B are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the SW effect of the comment type effect.

In the second control example, when the SW effect of the comment system effect is executed, the variation display is reduced and displayed in the lower left portion of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the patterns of the PUSH buttons corresponding to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the SW effect (4 times in this control example) are displayed vertically in the center of the screen. After that, the design of the PUSH button is changed to the comment display based on the pressing of the frame button 22 (see FIG. 123 (a)). The comment display displayed based on the pressing of the frame button 22 suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit with the content of the comment and the background of the comment.

Here, when a comment display suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is high is displayed, the comment display displayed based on the subsequent pressing of the frame button 22 is fixed to the one with a high expectation of a big hit. The button. For example, after the comment display of the school of fish is displayed as the background based on the first pressing of the frame button 22, the background of the comment display displayed based on the second and third pressing of the frame button 22 is also the school of fish. (See FIG. 123 (b)). As a result, the expectation of a big hit does not decrease, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the SW effect of the continuous striking system effect in the second control example will be described. FIGS. 124 (a) and 124 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the SW effect of the continuous striking system effect.

In the second control example, when the SW effect of the continuous striking effect is executed, the variation display is reduced and displayed at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the SW effect of the comment type effect described above. The PUSH button patterns corresponding to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed (4 times in this control example) in the SW effect are displayed vertically in the center of the screen. After that, based on the pressing of the frame button 22, the pattern of the PUSH button is erased, and instead, a part or all of the specific pattern (the pattern of the whale in this control example) is displayed (FIG. 124 (FIG. 124). a) See).

The above-mentioned whale pattern moves from the right side of the screen to the center of the screen based on the pressing of the frame button 22. For example, 1/4 of the whale pattern is displayed from the right side of the screen based on the first press, and 2/4 of the whale pattern is displayed based on the second press, and based on the third press. , 3/4 of the whale pattern is displayed, and based on the fourth pressing, all the whale patterns are displayed (see FIG. 124 (b)). As described above, in the SW effect of the continuous striking system effect, it is suggested that if all the whale patterns are displayed, it will be a big hit, and if not, it will not be a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the touch effect executed when the touch sensor detects the SW effect will be described. This touch effect is executed when a highly expected effect that becomes a big hit is executed by pressing the frame button 22 in the comment type effect and the continuous hit type effect described above.

First, in the comment-type effect or the continuous hit-type effect described above, the PUSH button patterns corresponding to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the SW effect (4 times in this control example) are displayed vertically in the center of the screen ( FIG. 125 (a)). After that, when the touch sensor detects it, the design of the PUSH button, which displays a highly expected effect that is a big hit, is enlarged and displayed based on the pressing of the frame button 22.

For example, in a comment-type effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed four times, when a school of fish is displayed as the background of the comment notice when the frame button 22 is pressed for the second time, the second PUSH button from the top The pattern of is enlarged and displayed (Fig. 125 (b)). Here, the display content of the SW effect at each pressing count is determined by pre-reading and acquiring the SW effect at the start of the SW effect. As a result, before pressing the frame button 22, it is possible to notify the player that an effect having a high expectation of being a big hit (that is, an effect having a low probability of being displayed) is displayed. It is possible to prompt the button 22 to be pressed.

<About the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129. FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 of the second control example.

First, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 126 (a). As shown in FIG. 126 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a variable pattern selection table 222a, an accessory interlocking effect table 222b, an opening / closing pattern storage area 222c, a background lottery table 222d, and a SW scenario storage area 222e. A SW effect selection table 222f is provided, and various data and programs necessary for controlling the game are stored in the SW effect selection table 222f. Since the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a to the SW scenario storage area 222e are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The SW effect selection table 222f defines the display contents of the SW effect between the comment type effect and the continuous hit type effect described above, and is out of the comment background table 222f1 at the time of normal reach and the comment background table 222f2 at the time of hit super reach. At least a time comment background table 222f3, a time-off fixed comment background table 222f4, a hit-time fixed comment background table 222f5, a comment table 222f6, and a continuous hitting production lottery table 222f7 are provided. A detailed description of each table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129.

The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 126 (b). As shown in FIG. 126 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example is provided with a fixed flag 223r and a SW pressing counter 223s in addition to the areas of the first control example described above.

The fixed flag 223r is set to ON when the fixed condition of the comment-type effect is satisfied in the SW effect selection process described later (see FIG. 131). When the fixed flag 223r is set to ON, the SW effect selected in the subsequent SW effect selection process is selected from the fixed table. As a result, it is possible to prevent switching from the comment-type production to the continuous hit-type production.

Not limited to this, the fixed flag 223r may be turned on when it is desired to prevent the effect from being switched in the continuous striking system effect.

The SW pressing counter 223s is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed. The SW pressing counter 223s is incremented by 1 each time the SW effect selection process, which is executed when the frame button 22 is pressed during the SW effect, is executed, and the number of times the SW is pressed is the upper limit value. If this happens, the SW scenario will be reset.

Next, the contents of the SW effect selection table 222f will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 129. First, the contents of the comment background table 222f1 at the time of hit normal reach will be described with reference to FIG. 127 (a). FIG. 127 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment background table 222f1 at the time of normal reach. The comment background table 222f1 at the time of hit normal reach defines the comment background of the comment-type effect to be selected when the hit / fail determination result is hit and the normal reach is executed. The comment background is defined to be selected by the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed and the effect counter.

Here, as the comment background, the display area of the comment notice display is a "blue background" displayed in blue, a "yellow background" displayed in yellow, a "red background" displayed in red, and a school of fish pattern. There is a "fish school background" that is displayed. As for the degree of expectation to be a big hit, "yellow background" has higher expectation than "blue background", and "red background" has higher expectation than "yellow background". The "fish school background" has higher expectations than the "red background".

In the comment background table 222f1 at the time of normal reach, "blue background" is selected when the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 299" when the frame button 22 is pressed for the first time, and "300 to 396" is selected. In the case of "", "yellow background" is selected, in the case of "397 to 398", "red background" is selected, and in the case of "399", "fish school background" is selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed for the second time, the value of the effect counter 223j is selected as "blue background" when it is "0 to 249", and "yellow background" when it is "250 to 349". Is selected, "red background" is selected in the case of "350 to 397", and "fish school background" is selected in the case of "398 to 399". Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed the third time, the value of the effect counter 223j is selected as "blue background" when it is "0 to 149", and "yellow background" when it is "150 to 299". Is selected, "red background" is selected in the case of "300 to 396", and "fish school background" is selected in the case of "397 to 399". When the frame button 22 is pressed the fourth time, the effect counter 223j is selected, "yellow background" is selected when it is "0 to 249", and "red background" is selected when it is "250 to 349". In the case of "350 to 399", the "fish school background" is selected, and the "blue background" is not selected.

Next, the comment background table 222f2 at the time of hit super reach will be described with reference to FIG. 127 (b). FIG. 127 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment background table 222f2 at the time of hit super reach. The hit super reach comment background table 222f2 is defined so that a comment background with a high expectation of a big hit is selected as compared with the hit normal reach comment background table 222f1 described above.

For the comment table background 222f2 at the time of super reach, "blue background" is selected when the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 149" when the frame button 22 is pressed for the first time, and "150 to". In the case of "349", "yellow background" is selected, in the case of "350 to 397", "red background" is selected, and in the case of "398 to 399", "fish school background" is selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed for the second time, the value of the effect counter 223j is selected as "blue background" when it is "0 to 149", and "yellow background" when it is "150 to 299". Is selected, "red background" is selected in the case of "300 to 396", and "fish school background" is selected in the case of "397 to 399". Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed the third time, the value of the effect counter 223j is selected as "yellow background" when the value is "0 to 249", and "red background" when the value is "250 to 349". Is selected, and in the case of "350 to 399", the "fish school background" is selected, and the "blue background" is not selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed the fourth time, the effect counter 223j is selected, when it is "0 to 249", "red background" is selected, and when it is "250 to 399", "fish school background" is selected. And "blue background" and "yellow background" are not selected.

As described above, the hit super reach comment background table 222f2 is defined so that a comment background with a high expectation of a big hit can be easily selected as compared with the hit normal reach comment background table 222f1. As a result, in the comment-based production of Super Reach, it is possible to easily display the ones with a high degree of expectation that will be a big hit compared to Normal Reach. In this control example, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the same (4 times) for the super reach and the normal reach, but the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the normal reach may be reduced. .. As a result, even if the background display is selected using the same table for the super reach and the normal reach, the super reach has a configuration that is more likely to be a big hit and a highly expected production than the normal reach, and the area of the ROM 222 is occupied. You can save.

Next, the contents of the comment background table 222f3 at the time of disengagement will be described with reference to FIG. 128 (a). FIG. 128 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the comment background table 222f3 at the time of disengagement. The comment background table 222f3 at the time of loss is defined so that a comment background with a low expectation of a big hit is selected as compared with the comment background table 222f1 at the time of hit normal reach and the comment background table 222f2 at the time of hit super reach. ..

For the comment table background 222f3 at the time of disengagement, when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the first time, when the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 349", "blue background" is selected and "350 to 396". In the case of, "yellow background" is selected, in the case of "397 to 398", "red background" is selected, and in the case of "399", "fish school background" is selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed for the second time, the value of the effect counter 223j is selected as "blue background" when it is "0 to 299", and "yellow background" when it is "300 to 396". Is selected, "red background" is selected in the case of "397 to 398", and "fish school background" is selected in the case of "399". Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed the third time, the value of the effect counter 223j is selected as "blue background" when it is "0 to 249", and "yellow background" when it is "250 to 349". Is selected, "red background" is selected in the case of "350 to 398", and "fish school background" is selected in the case of "399". When the frame button 22 is pressed the fourth time, the effect counter 223j is selected, "blue background" is selected when it is "0 to 149", and "yellow background" is selected when it is "150 to 349". In the case of "350 to 397", the "red background" is selected, and in the case of "398 to 399", the "fish school background" is selected.

Next, the contents of the fixed comment background table 222f4 at the time of disconnection will be described with reference to FIG. 128 (b). FIG. 128 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the fixed comment background table 222f4 at the time of disconnection. The fixed comment background table 222f4 at the time of disengagement is used for selecting the comment-type effect when the fixed condition of the comment-type effect is satisfied and the fixed flag 223r is turned on (S6103 in FIG. 131). Further, in the fixed comment background table 222f4 at the time of deviation, the comment background to be selected is defined based on the previous background type and the effect counter 223j.

Specifically, when the type of the previous comment background is "red background", when the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 7", "red background" is selected and "red background" is selected. If it is "8-9", "fish school background" is selected. Further, when the type of the previous comment background is "fish school background", if the first digit of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 9" (that is, in all cases), "fish school background" is selected. .. As a result, when the fixed condition of the comment-based production is satisfied, the expectation of a big hit suggested by the comment background does not decrease, and the player's interest can be improved.

Next, the contents of the hit-time fixed comment background table 222f5 will be described with reference to FIG. 128 (c). FIG. 128 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit-time fixed comment background table 222f5. The hit-fixed comment background table 222f5 is used when the fixed condition of the comment-type effect is satisfied, as in the case-of-off fixed comment background table 222f4 described above. The hit-fixed comment background table 222f5 is used when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, unlike the miss-time fixed comment background table 222f4, which is used when the hit / fail determination result is wrong.

Specifically, when the type of the previous comment background is "red background", when the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 3", "red background" is selected and "red background" is selected. If it is "4-9", "fish school background" is selected. Further, when the type of the previous comment background is "fish school background", if the first digit of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 9" (that is, in all cases), "fish school background" is selected. .. As a result, when the fixed condition of the comment-based production is satisfied, the expectation of a big hit suggested by the comment background does not decrease, and the player's interest can be improved.

Next, the contents of the comment table 222f6 will be described with reference to FIG. 129 (a). FIG. 129 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the comment table 222f6. The comment table 222f6 defines the content of the comment notice displayed in the comment-based production described above.

The comment table 222f6 defines the content of the comment notice to be displayed based on the background type and the effect counter 223j. Specifically, when the background type is "blue background" and the first digit of the value of the production counter 223j is "0 to 3", "do your best" is selected as the content of the comment notice, and "do your best". If it is "4-6", "still" is selected as the content of the comment notice, if it is "7-8", "ikeike" is selected as the content of the comment notice, and if it is "9", the comment is made. "A little more" is selected as the content of the notice. Further, when the background type is "yellow background" and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 3", "chance?" Is selected as the content of the comment notice, and "4 to" If it is "6", "Oh?" Is selected as the content of the comment notice, if it is "7-8", "What is this?" Is selected as the content of the comment notice, and if it is "9", it is selected. "Maybe?" Is selected as the content of the comment notice. Further, when the background type is "red background" and the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 3", "chance!" Is selected as the content of the comment notice, and "4 to" If it is "6", "OK!" Is selected as the content of the comment notice, if it is "7-8", "Good!" Is selected as the content of the comment notice, and if it is "9", the comment is made. "Sore!" Is selected as the content of the notice. Further, when the background type is "fish school background" and the first digit of the value of the production counter 223j is "0 to 3", "great chance !!" is selected as the content of the comment notice, and "great chance !!" is selected. If it is "4-6", "OK !!" is selected as the content of the comment notice, and if it is "7-8", "Wow !!" is selected as the content of the comment notice, and "9" is selected. If there is, "Super hot !!" is selected as the content of the comment notice.

In this way, since the content of the comment notice to be displayed is selected based on the background type, the content of the comment notice and the expected degree of jackpot suggested by the comment background can be matched, and the game is easy for the player to understand. It can be an opportunity. Further, although the comment background and the content of the comment notice are selected based on the effect counter 223j, the content of the comment notice is selected based on the first digit of the value of the effect counter 223j. ing. As a result, the comment background and the content of the comment notice can be randomly selected, and the variations displayed in the comment-based production can be increased, so that the player's interest can be improved. In this control example, the content of the comment notice is selected based on the type of the comment background, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the content of the comment notice is selected regardless of the type of the comment background. You may. Further, the content of the comment notice may be selected first, and then the type of the comment background may be selected based on the content of the comment notice.

Next, the contents of the continuous hitting production lottery table 222f7 will be described with reference to FIG. 129 (b). FIG. 129 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the continuous hitting production lottery table 222f7. The continuous hitting effect lottery table 222f7 defines whether or not a specific pattern is displayed based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and the value of the effect counter 223j.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the first time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 199", the whale pattern which is a specific pattern is 1. / 4 is displayed (see FIG. 124 (a)), and if it is "200 to 399", it is not displayed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the second time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 149", the whale pattern is displayed in 2/4, and if it is "150 to 399", the previous time. Will remain displayed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the third time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 119", the whale pattern is displayed 3/4, and if it is "120 to 399", the previous time. Will remain displayed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed the fourth time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 99", it is notified that all the whale patterns are displayed and a big hit is obtained (FIG. 124 (b). ), If it is "100 to 399", the previous display remains. Here, when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is the fourth time, the value of the effect counter 223j becomes "100 to 399", and when all the whale patterns are not displayed, it means that a separate big hit is made after that. Be notified.

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect and the frame button 22 is pressed for the first time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 199", the whale pattern, which is a specific pattern, is displayed in 1/4. (See FIG. 124 (a)), and if it is "200 to 399", it is not displayed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the second time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 99", the whale pattern is displayed in 2/4, and if it is "100 to 399", the previous time. Will remain displayed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the third time, if the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 49", the whale pattern is displayed 3/4, and if it is "50 to 399", the previous time. Will remain displayed. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed for the fourth time, the previous display remains regardless of the value of the effect counter 223j, and the jackpot notification is not displayed.

As described above, in the comment-type production, the player recognizes the content and the expectation of the jackpot by reading the content of the comment, while in the continuous hit-type production, the player has a specific pattern (book). In the control example, it is sufficient to pay attention to whether or not all the whale patterns are displayed. Therefore, the comment-type production must have a longer production period than the continuous-stroke production. In this control example, when the SW effective time is shortened by the process of S6104 described later, the continuous hitting type effect that the player can recognize even in the short time effect is displayed. As a result, the game machine can be made easy for the player to understand.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131, each control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example replaces the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment with the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1350). ) Is executed, and is the same in other respects. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1350) will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1350). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1350) is a process executed when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 and a SW effect is selected.

In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1350), first, it is determined whether or not there is a SW scenario in the SW scenario storage area 223o (S6001). If it is determined that there is a SW scenario in the processing of S6001 (S6001: Yes), the SW scenario is updated (S6002), and it is determined whether or not the SW is valid period based on the updated SW scenario (S6001: Yes). S6003). On the other hand, in the process of S6001, when it is determined that there is no SW scenario (S6001: No), it means that the SW effect is not executed, so the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S6003, when it is determined that the SW valid period is (S6003: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S6004), and the process proceeds to the process of S6005. The value of the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S6004 is used in the SW effect selection process (S6006) described later. On the other hand, in the process of S6003, when it is determined that the SW valid period is not (S6003: No), it is not the timing to execute the effect based on pressing the SW, so the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S6005, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6005), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6005: Yes), an effect based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is executed. Therefore, the SW effect selection process (S6006) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S6005, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor is on (S6007).

If it is determined in the process of S6007 that the touch sensor is on (S6007: Yes), a display touch sensor command is set to display the touch effect (see FIG. 125) in the SW effect described above (see FIG. 125). S6008), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S6007, if it is determined that the touch sensor is off (S6007: No), this process ends as it is. Here, the display touch sensor command set in the process of S6008 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221 is performed. ), It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display touch sensor command, the display control device 114 displays the touch effect (see FIG. 125) in the SW effect described above on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the details of the SW effect selection process (S6006) will be described with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the SW effect selection process (S6006). This SW effect selection process is a process of selecting an effect to be displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed while the SW effect is being displayed.

In the SW effect selection process (S6006), first, the SW press counter 223s is added by 1 (S6101), and it is determined whether or not the fixed flag 223r is ON (S6102). In the process of S6102, when it is determined that the fixed flag 223r is ON (S6102: Yes), it means that the fixed condition for fixing the SW effect is satisfied, so the effect is produced from the fixed table (222f4 or 222f5). Is selected, and the process proceeds to S6110.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fixed flag 223r is off in the processing of S6102 (S6102: No), the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less based on the SW scenario stored in the SW scenario storage area 223o. It is determined whether or not there is (S6104).

In the processing of S6104, when it is determined that the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S6104: Yes), since the remaining production period is short, the continuous striking type production that can display the production period shorter than the comment type production is displayed. In order to execute the SW effect, the SW effect is selected from the continuous hit system effect selection table 222f7 based on the effect counter 223j and the SW press counter 223s. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effective time is longer than 5 seconds (S6104: No), since the remaining effect period is sufficient, the effect counter 223j is displayed from the comment system effect selection table (222f1,222f2,222f3,222f6). The SW effect is selected based on the SW press counter 223s. Here, as a method of selecting the comment-type effect, first, the comment background is selected from the comment background table (222f1 to 222f3) according to the hit / fail determination result and the fluctuation pattern type, and then the selected comment background and the value of the effect counter 223j are selected. The content of the comment notice is selected from the comment table accordingly.

After finishing the process of S6106, it is then determined whether or not the fixed condition is satisfied (S6107). Specifically, when the selected comment background is "red background" or "fish school background", it is determined that the fixed condition is satisfied. As a result, even though a high expectation for a big hit is displayed, a production with a remarkably low expectation for a big hit is displayed after that, which impairs the player's willingness to play. Can be suppressed. In this control example, fixed conditions are set so that the expectation of the comment background is not impaired, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the content of the comment notice has a story (1st to 4th times). A fixed condition may be satisfied when all the contents of the notice are displayed so that the contents can be understood) is selected. As a result, even though the content of the comment notice with a story is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by switching to the continuous hitting type production in the middle.

If it is determined in the process of S6108 that the fixed condition is satisfied (S6107: Yes), the fixed flag 223r is set to ON (S6109), and the process proceeds to the process of S6110. On the other hand, in the process of S6108, when it is determined that the fixed condition is not satisfied (S6108: No), the process of S6109 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6110.

In the processing of S6110, a display pressing effect command indicating the effect selected in the processing of S6103, S6106 or S6107 is set (S6110), and the number of SW pressings is the upper limit value (in this control example) based on the SW pressing counter 223s. 4 times) or not (S6111).

If it is determined in the process of S6111 that the number of times the SW is pressed is the upper limit value (S6111: Yes), the SW scenario storage area 223o is reset (S6112), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S6111, if it is determined that the number of times the SW is pressed is not the upper limit value (S6111: No), S61112 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the second control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 132. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example is different in that a part of the process of the advance notice effect command (S2815) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first control example is changed, and is the same in other respects. Is. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The details of the advance notice effect command processing (S2815) will be described with reference to FIG. 132. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect command processing (S2815). This advance notice effect command process (S2815) is for executing the process corresponding to the advance notice effect command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In this advance notice effect command processing (S2815), the processing of S4401 to S4405 is executed as in the first control example. If it is determined in the processing of S4405 that a display pressing command has been received (S4405: Yes), the notice display data table corresponding to the set SW effect pressing effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4405: Yes). S4406), the display data table whose number of presses has been updated is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4450), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4405, if it is determined that the display pressing command has not been received (S4405: No), the processes of S4406 and S4450 are skipped, and this process is terminated.

By the process of S4450, the pressing effect (see FIGS. 123 and 124) according to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed can be executed. Further, by the processing of S4406, it is possible to switch between the continuous striking type effect and the comment type effect based on the pressing command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

<About the third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 141. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above, when the SW effect is selected based on the fluctuation pattern, the effect of pressing the frame button 22 a plurality of times is executed. Specifically, as the SW effect, a comment-type effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot based on the content of the comment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the background of the comment based on the pressing of the frame button 22, and the frame. Based on the pressing of the button 22, there is provided a continuous striking effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit depending on whether or not a specific pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The comment-type effect and the continuous hit-type effect can be switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied. On the other hand, in the third control example, in the effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22, the probability that the effect is selected is controlled so as to be switched to a different selection table depending on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed and the remaining time of the SW effective time. It's different. Only the points different from the second control example will be described, and the description of the same points as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 133 to 134, an example of a display mode in a continuous striking effect using the frame button 22 displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the third control example will be described. In the third control example, when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 selects a fluctuation pattern for executing the SW notice effect, the SW notice effect set in the fluctuation pattern is set, and the variation of the third symbol is set. An effect of notifying the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 as shown in FIG. 133 (a) is executed during the display. In the SW notice effect in the third control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed and a lottery (lottery for whether or not to display the effect) is won, a display mode indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed.

FIG. 133 (a) is a display mode displayed at the start of the SW notice effect. The fluctuation pattern in which the SW notice effect is set is selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is pressed at a predetermined timing during the fluctuation display of the third symbol. A display mode (FIG. 133 (a)) for notifying the player of the start is displayed. In the SW notice effect in the third control example, as shown in FIG. 133 (a), the third symbol, which has been variablely displayed at high speed, is reduced and displayed in the upper right, and the display mode of the SW notice effect is displayed in the other display areas. Is configured to be displayed. As shown in FIG. 133 (a), an indicator is displayed, and the indicator (meter) is displayed in a variable manner (the color of the memory of the indicator is changed by pressing the frame button 22). The color of the memory of this indicator is changed in order from the memory on the right according to the pressing of the frame button 22, and when the color is changed up to the memory of MAX, the player is notified that the expectation for a big hit is high. (See FIG. 134 (a)).

In addition, in the display mode of the SW notice effect, a pattern imitating the frame button 22 is displayed, and the characters "continuous hits !!" are displayed on the symbol to notify that the game method is to repeatedly hit the frame button 22. Has been done. Further, below the symbol imitating the frame button 22, a remaining amount meter M indicating the remaining time during which the frame button 22 can be pressed (the remaining period of the SW valid period) is displayed. The remaining amount meter M is configured so that the internal color is changed from right to left as the SW effective time decreases. At the start of the SW notice effect, the inside of the remaining amount meter M is all displayed in red, but it is variably displayed in white (the red display decreases) in order from the right side (see FIG. 133 (b)). When the inside is changed to white, the player is notified that the SW effective time has expired. In addition, at the start of the SW notice effect, a game explanation of the SW notice effect (corresponding to the character display of "Set the meter to MAX !!" and "When it reaches MAX, it is extremely hot !!"). After that, the SW effective time starts, but until then, the color of the remaining amount meter M is not variable, and the player can recognize that the SW effective time has not started.

FIG. 134A is an example of a display mode displayed when the lottery for the effect is won by pressing the frame button 22. As shown in FIG. 134 (a), when the lottery for the production is won, the color is variable (variable from white to red) up to the MAX memory of the indicator, and the jackpot expectation is indicated by "Gekiatsu !!" The characters are displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134 (b), if the lottery for the production cannot be won even if the SW valid time has elapsed and the remaining time has expired, the characters "Sorry!" Are displayed and a big hit is expected. The effect of notifying the degree is not displayed. In this control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed, a lottery is made every time whether or not the effect is hit. The lottery probability is set higher when the lottery result of the variable pattern displayed in a variable manner is a hit than when it is a miss, and the characters "super hot !!" are displayed. It can be expected that the fluctuation pattern that will be a big hit is being executed.

In this control example, the fluctuation pattern in which the SW notice effect is set is limited to the fluctuation pattern that is a hit or the fluctuation pattern that is out of the super reach. Therefore, the player can recognize that the player will always reach when the SW notice effect is executed, and if the frame button 22 can be pressed to display the characters "Gekiatsu !!", it is a big hit. It can be expected that the fluctuation pattern is as follows.

In this control example, the degree of expectation of the jackpot is displayed during the fluctuation of the third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery result may be directly notified. Not limited to jackpots, you can give points for production, and by using those points, you can add items for production, display a two-dimensional bar code, etc., and import them with a mobile phone, etc., to create a standby image on the Internet. It may be configured so that benefits such as can be obtained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the electrical configuration in the third control example will be described. In the electrical configuration in the third control example, the contents of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed with respect to the second control example. FIG. 135A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example. In ROM 222 in the third control example, a lottery table 222g is added to ROM 222 in the second control example. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the second control example, the description thereof will be omitted.

The lottery table 222g in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 (a) to 136 (f). The lottery table 222g is composed of a first lottery table 222g1, a second lottery table 222g2, a third lottery table 222g3, a fourth lottery table 222g4, a fifth lottery table 222g5, and a sixth lottery table 222g6. The first to third lottery tables 222g1 to g3 are set so that the number of values of the effect counter 223j, which is determined to be the winning effect, differs depending on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed. Further, in each lottery table, a larger number of effect counters 223j, which are determined to be a hit when the lottery result of the fluctuating special symbol (third symbol) is a hit, is set.

In the first lottery table 222g1 to the third lottery table 222g3, when the remaining time of the SW effective time (set to 10 seconds in this control example) is more than 5 seconds, and when the remaining time is 5 seconds or less, the frame button 22 is pressed 10 times or more. It is a lottery table that is selected when it is. The first lottery table 222g1 is selected when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is 1 to 19 times, and the second lottery table 222g2 is selected when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is 20 to 39 times. The third lottery table 222g3 is a lottery table that is selected when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is 40 or more.

The fourth lottery table 222g4 to the sixth lottery table 222g6 are lottery tables selected when the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is less than 10 times when the remaining time of the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less. The fourth lottery table 222g4 to the sixth lottery table 222g6 have the same lottery probability as the first lottery table 222g1 to the third lottery table 222g3, but the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is set to half. Therefore, it is configured so that even a player who presses the frame button 22 less frequently can easily set the effect.

In this control example, the lottery tables having different selection probabilities are switched according to the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 137 (a) to 137 (c), the SW effective time The lottery tables having different lottery probabilities may be switched depending on the remaining time of. Further, the above-mentioned configuration in which the lottery table is switched depending on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed and the remaining time of the SW effective time may be combined. In this case, the more the frame button 22 is pressed, the higher the lottery probability is set, and when the remaining time is shorter, the lottery probability is set higher. As a result, if the player presses the frame button 22, the possibility of winning the effect can be further increased by continuing to press the frame button 22 during the SW validity period.

Next, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 135 (b). The RAM 223 in the third control example is different from the first control example described above in that an interval counter 223t, an indicator level 223u, an adapted flag 223v, and a switching flag 223w are added, and is the same in other respects. is there. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The interval counter 223t is periodically (every 4 ms) in the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 201 of the voice lamp control device 113 during the execution of the SW effect (see FIG. 133) described above. In the button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (see FIG. 138), 1 is added when the frame button 22 is not pressed. This interval counter 223t is referred to in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3, and when it is determined that the value of the interval counter 223t is the upper limit value (750 in this control example, that is, corresponding to 3 seconds), the indicator level 223u is subtracted by 1. As a result, if the frame button 22 is not pressed for a predetermined time (3 seconds in this control example) during the execution of the SW effect (see FIG. 133) described above, the indicator level display is reduced by 1. The effect of displaying this indicator level suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high when the indicator level increases to the maximum value. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to continuously press the frame button 22 so that the indicator level does not decrease, and it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to press the frame button 22.

The indicator level 223u is for storing the amount of indicators to be displayed in the above-mentioned SW effect (see FIG. 133). Specifically, the indicator displayed in the SW effect is divided into eight areas in the left-right direction, and is lit in order from the left area. In this control example, it is determined to what extent the above-mentioned eight regions are lit based on the value of the indicator level 223u. For example. If the value of the indicator level 223u is "1", only the leftmost area is lit, if it is "4", the area from the leftmost to the fourth is lit, and if it is "8", all the areas are lit. The area is lit.

This indicator level 223u is set in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (FIG. 138), the SW effect selection process 2 (FIG. 140), or the SW effect selection process 3 (FIG. 141), which will be described later.

The adapted flag 223v is a flag used for determining whether or not the lottery table 223g for selecting the SW effect has been switched in the above-mentioned SW effect (see FIG. 133). The adapted flag 223v is executed when the SW valid period of the SW effect described above is 5 seconds or less. In the SW pressing adaptation process (FIG. 139), the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is a predetermined number of times (this control). In the example, it is set to on when it is less than 10 times). In this case, the switching flag 223w, which will be described later, is set to ON, and the table for selecting the SW effect is switched. When the adapted flag 223v is turned on, it can be determined that the table for selecting this SW effect has been switched.

The switching flag 223w is a flag used to determine whether or not to switch the lottery table 223g for selecting the SW effect in the above-mentioned SW effect (see FIG. 133). The switching flag 223w is executed when the SW valid period of the SW effect described above is 5 seconds or less, and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is a predetermined number of times in the SW pressing adaptation process (FIG. 139) (this control example). If it is less than 10 times), it is set to on. When this switching flag 223w is turned on, the process of selecting the SW effect changes from the SW effect selection process 2 that uses the first to third lottery tables to the SW effect selection process 3 that uses the fourth to sixth lottery tables. It will be switched to. As a result, it is possible to display a highly-expected effect that is a big hit even for a player who presses a small number of times in the SW effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 141. Since the control process of the main control device 110 is the same as that of the second control example, the description thereof will be omitted.

The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1360) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1360). In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1360), the same processing as in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S1350) in the second control example is executed in S6001 to S6004. After the processing of S6004 is executed, it is determined whether the remaining period of the SW valid period is 5 seconds or less (S6050). This SW validity period is set in the SW scenario, and is subtracted when the SW scenario is updated. When it is determined that the remaining period of the SW valid period is 5 seconds or less (S6050: Yes), the SW pressing adaptation process is executed (S6051). The details of this SW pressing adaptation process (S6051) will be described later with reference to FIG. 139.

On the other hand, in the process of S6050, when it is determined that the remaining period of the SW valid period is longer than 5 seconds (S6050: No), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed (S6052). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the process of S6052 (S6052: Yes), the interval counter 223t is reset (S6053), the SW effect selection process 2 is executed (S7008), and this process is performed. finish. The details of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIG. 140.

In the process of S6052, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S6052: No), the interval counter 223t is added by 1 (S6055), and it is determined whether or not the interval counter 223t is the upper limit (S6052). S6056). When the interval counter is determined to be the upper limit value in the processing of S6056, the indicator level 223u is subtracted by 1 (S6057), a display command indicating the updated indicator level 223u is set (S6058), and the interval counter is set. The 223t is reset (S6059) to end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S6056, when it is determined that the interval counter is not the upper limit value, the processes of S6057 to S6059 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

Here, the details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S1360) will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW pressing adaptation process (S6051), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S1360).

In the SW pressing adaptation process (S6051), first, it is determined whether the adaptation flag 223v is on. The adapted flag 223v is executed by the process of determining the pressed state of the player (the process of S7002 to S7004) based on the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed in the first half of the SW valid period (the remaining period is from 10 seconds to 5 seconds). It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been set. When it is determined that the adapted flag 223v is off (S7001: No), the adapted flag 223v is set to on (S7002). It is determined whether the value of the SW press count counter 223s is less than 10 (S7003). When it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223s is less than 10 (S7003: No), the process of S7005 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223s is 10 or more (S7003: Yes), the switching flag 223w is set to ON (S7004). After that, the process of S7005 is executed. The switching flag 223w is a flag indicating that the lottery table is set to be switched even if the number of times the player presses the first half of the frame button 22 is small because the number of times the player presses the frame button 22 is small.

In S7005, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S7005). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S7005: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S7005: Yes), it is determined whether the switching flag 223w is on (S7006). When it is determined that the switching flag 223w is off (S7006: No), the SW effect selection process 2 is executed (S7008), and this process ends. The details of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) will be described later with reference to FIG. 140.

On the other hand, in the process of S7006, if it is determined that the switching flag 223w is on (S7006: Yes), the SW effect selection process 3 is executed (S7007), and this process is terminated. The details of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7007) will be described later with reference to FIG. 141.

Here, the details of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008). As described above, the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) is a process executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (see FIG. 138) and the SW press adaptation process (S6051).

In the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008), first, 1 is added to the value of the SW pressing counter 223s and updated (S7101). It is determined whether or not the first lottery table 222g1 is set (S7102). When it is determined that the first lottery table 222g1 is set (S7102: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is less than 20 (S7103). When it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223s is less than 20 (S7103), the process of S7108 is executed without switching the lottery table. On the other hand, in the process of S7103, when it is determined that the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is 20 or more (S7103: Yes), the second lottery table 222g2 is switched and set (S7104). After that, the process of S7108 is executed.

When it is determined in the process of S7102 that the first lottery table 222g1 is not set (S7102: No), it is determined whether the second lottery table 222g2 is set (S7105). When it is determined that the second lottery table 222g2 is set (S7105: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW press count counter 223s is less than 40 (S7106). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7105 that the second lottery table 222g2 is not set (S7105: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7108.

If it is determined in the processing of S7106 that the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is less than 40 (S7106: Yes), the third lottery table 223g3 is switched to and set (S7107), and the process proceeds to S7108. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the SW pressing counter 223s is 40 or more (S7106: No), the processing of S7107 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7108.

In the process of S7108, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result related to the variable display during execution is a hit (S7108). In the process of S7108, if it is determined that the determination result is a hit (S7108: Yes), the indicator level is set to 8 (S7109), and a display command indicating the set indicator level is set (S7110). , The notification sound and the lamp data are set (S7111), the SW effective time is reset (S7112), and this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S7108, when it is determined that the determination result is not a hit (S7108: No), it is determined whether or not the indicator level 223u is 6 or less (S7113). When it is determined that the indicator level 223u is 6 or less in the process of S7113 (S7113: Yes), the indicator level 223u is added by 1 (S7114), and a display command indicating the added indicator level 223u is set. (S7115), this process is terminated.

Here, the display command indicating the indicator level 223u set in S7110 and S7115 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221. In the process (S1302), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives this display command, the display control device 114 executes the SW effect according to the indicator level 223u of the command received by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 133).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S7113 that the indicator level 223u is larger than 6 (S7113: No), the processes of S7114 and S7115 are skipped, and this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the SW effect selection process 3 (S7007) will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the SW effect selection process 3 (S7007). The SW effect selection process 3 (S7007) is a process executed to select the SW effect when the switching flag 223w is on in the SW press adaptation process (FIG. 139) described above.

In the SW effect selection process 3 (S7007), the SW effect selection process 2 (S7008) described above and the fourth lottery table are replaced with the first lottery table, and the fifth lottery table is replaced with the second lottery table. The difference is that the sixth lottery table is used instead of the three lottery tables, and they are the same in other respects. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this control example, in the continuous hitting effect of continuously pressing the frame button 22, the process of changing the probability of determining that the effect is displayed according to the number of repeated hits is configured to be performed by switching the table. Therefore, since the selection probability can be changed by a simple process, the interest of the game can be changed.

In the present embodiment, the case where the predetermined effect is displayed by repeatedly hitting the advance notice effect executed during the fluctuation time of the special symbol has been described, but the case is not limited to this, and the case where the third symbol is a big hit. In addition, by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 during a jackpot game, a normal game, etc. without notifying whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot, a probabilistic change is given (whether it is a probabilistic game state). May be configured to be used in an effect of notifying the player by lottery. Even in such a case, a period during which the frame button 22 can be repeatedly hit is set, and the lottery table for whether or not to notify the effect based on the number of repeated hits in that period, the remaining time of the effective time, etc. is set. By configuring it, the timing at which the effect is notified when the frame button 22 is pressed can be made random. Further, for a player who has a small number of repeated hits of the frame button 22 or a slow continuous hitting speed, it is possible to perform an effect suitable for the player by switching and setting a table having a high selection probability.

<About the 4th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 146. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, the configuration in which the game ball is periodically guided to the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650 and guided to the second specific winning opening 650b has been described. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, in a configuration in which the game ball is randomly guided to the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650, it becomes easier to enter the second specific winning opening 650b and the second specific winning opening 650b. The configuration set for the case where the ball is difficult to enter and the case where the ball is controlled will be described. It should be noted that only the points different from the first control example will be described, and the description of the same points as the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be omitted. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 142 shows the opening pattern of the ball entry control plate 654 of the specific winning device 650 when the game ball is guided to the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650 in the fourth control example, and the ball entering of the guided game ball. , It is a timing chart which showed the non-entry pattern respectively. FIG. 142 (a) is a timing chart showing how to enter the ball from one round to two rounds when the jackpot C (16 round jackpot) is selected. As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the jackpot C, the ball entry control plate 654 is opened for 1 second in the first round, and is opened for 1.6 seconds in the second round. Then, after an interval of 10 seconds (closing operation of the ball entry control plate 654), the third round is executed. From the third round onward, until a 30-second open or 10-ball game ball is detected by the first ball entry sensor 652a or the second ball entry sensor 652b (at the first specific winning opening 650a or the second specific winning opening 650b). It is executed (until 10 balls enter).

In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and 10 balls may be entered into the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650. In that case, after 10 balls have entered the entrance portion 651a of the specific winning device 650, a means for restricting the entry of the balls into the entrance portion of the specific winning device 650 may be provided.

The interval time between the first round and the second round (the closing time of the ball entry control plate 654) is composed of one second. During that time, the game ball that has flowed down to the first specific winning opening 650a cannot enter the first specific winning opening 650a and flows down to the detour flow path 653. Since the detour time from flowing down the detour flow path 653 to reaching the second specific winning opening 650b is composed of 1.6 seconds, even if the game ball arrives immediately when it is closed after one round. By the time the second specific winning opening 650b is reached during the closing time, the ball entry restriction plate 654 is open. Therefore, the game ball heading for the second specific winning opening 650b can enter the second specific winning opening 650b. In addition, since the opening period of the second round is set to 1.6 seconds, it is a game ball that has reached the first specific winning opening 650a just before the start of the second round and has flowed down to the detour flow path 653. However, the ball can be entered into the second specific winning opening 650b. Therefore, all the game balls guided to the first specific winning opening 650a during the interval period (during the closing time) are configured to be able to enter the second specific winning opening 650b in the second round.

With reference to FIG. 142 (b), it is a timing chart showing the state of entering the second specific winning opening 650b in the case of a small hit (2 rounds) in the fourth control example. The small hit consists of two rounds of games. The opening period of the first and second rounds is set to 1 second, and the interval period between the first round and the second round is set to 0.6 seconds. In this way, the first and second rounds of the jackpot C and the first and second rounds of the small hit differ only slightly in the opening period and the interval period, and this difference is very short. Because of the difference, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the difference. Therefore, even in the third symbol display device 81, it is difficult to distinguish between the small hit and the big hit C, so that the player can make a small hit C when the hit game is started. It is difficult to determine if it is.

Since the interval period of the small hit is 0.6 seconds and the opening period of the second round is 1 second, the added time is 1.6 seconds and the detour period is 1.6 seconds. Since it is configured, the detoured game ball cannot enter the second specific winning opening 650b in the second round. Therefore, in the second round of the small hit game, although the ball may enter the first specific winning opening 650a, it is difficult to enter the second specific winning opening 650b.

In the fourth control example, the effect of whether or not this hit game is the jackpot C is performed using the third symbol display device 81 in the interval period (10 seconds) after the end of the two rounds of the jackpot C and the small hit. Will be. In this effect, the larger the number of game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening 650b between the first and second rounds, the more advantageous the effect is displayed for the player. Specifically, if an enemy is displayed and the main character fights against the enemy and wins, it is notified that the jackpot is C. In this case, a large number of life gauges of the main character are set according to the number of balls entered in the second specific winning opening 650b. Therefore, even if it is attacked by the enemy, it is difficult to lose. As described above, in this control example, since the player is given the right to know at an early stage whether or not the jackpot is C during the game of 1 to 2 rounds, a large number of game balls are used. Even during the period of the open pattern that cannot be obtained, the player can fire the game ball to play the game.

Next, the control process in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 146. First, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing (S104). The special symbol variation processing in the fourth control example determines whether or not the lottery result is a small hit with respect to the above-mentioned first control example (S250), and when the lottery result is a small hit (S250: Yes), it differs only in that it sets the start of a small hit (S251), and is the same in other respects. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the jackpot control process 2 (S1050), in the first control example, only the jackpot was controlled, but the small hit control is also added. Specifically, it is configured to determine whether the process of S1150 and S1151 is the start of a big hit or a small hit, and also in the process of S1151 to determine whether the process is a big hit or a small hit. The other parts are the same, and the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the jackpot command processing (S1412) in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the jackpot command process 2 (S1420). In the jackpot command processing 2 (S1420), the processing of S1810 is changed to the inter-round processing (S1850) with respect to the jackpot command processing (S1420) in the first control example. The inter-round processing (S1850) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 146.

FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the contents of this inter-round processing (S1850). In the inter-round processing (S1859), first, the flag 223m during the round is set to off (S8001). Then, it is determined whether it is a small hit or a big hit C (S8002). When it is determined that it is a small hit or a big hit C (S8002: Yes), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the second round (S8003). When it was determined that it was the end timing of the second round, the type of jackpot being executed (whether it was a jackpot C or a small hit) and the number of balls entered into the second specific winning opening 650b were shown. A display command is set (S8004). The display command set in S8004 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives this display command, the life gauge corresponds to whether the main character wins or the enemy wins, and the number of balls entered into the second specific winning opening 650b, based on the jackpot type. Display settings are executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8002, when it is determined that it is not a small hit or a big hit C (S8002: No), and in the processing of S8003, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the second round (S8003: No), this processing is performed. finish.

In the fourth control example, in the small hit, the game ball between rounds is configured not to enter the second specific winning opening 650b, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two rounds so that about one ball can be won. The eye opening period may be set to 1.2 seconds or the like. With this configuration, even if it is a small hit, the expectation that it is a big hit C can be more sustained.

Further, in the detour flow path 654 described above, a material having a high friction coefficient is used or unevenness is provided on the road surface portion so that the friction coefficient of the road surface becomes high so that the flow speed of the game ball decreases. You may. As a result, the time required for the game ball to pass through the detour flow path 654 increases, so that the game ball stays in the detour flow path 654 during the interval time even if the interval time becomes long. Therefore, after that, the interval time ends, and the ball can be entered into the second specific winning opening 650b.

Further, the above-mentioned detour flow path may be configured so that the passage time is variable. For example, a plurality of detour channels having different transit times may be provided so that the game ball can be distributed to the detour channels, or a movable wall portion that is movable in the detour channel is provided and the movable wall portion is movable. By doing so, the time for passing through the detour flow path may be changed. In addition, a mechanism such as a croon may be provided in the detour flow path so that the passing time of the game ball is random. As a result, the transit time of the detour flow path can be varied, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, the number of specific winning openings provided in the above-mentioned specific winning device 650 is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Further, the specific winning opening provided in the specific winning device 650 is not limited to the specific winning opening, and may be a starting winning opening for starting the start of a special symbol, or a predetermined winning ball based on the winning ball. It may be a general winning opening for which is paid, or it may be a combination thereof.

Further, in the first to fourth control examples described above, a lottery for the same special symbol is performed based on the balls entered into the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, but the first winning is won. Based on the entry into the mouth 64 and the second winning opening 640, for example, the first special symbol is drawn based on the entry into the first winning opening 64, and based on the entry into the second winning opening 640. The second special symbol may be drawn by lottery. As a result, the variation of the game can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, in the first to fourth control examples described above, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the command from the main control device 110 is configured to execute various effects, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to be executed by the main control device 110. As a result, since it is not necessary to send and receive commands, it is possible to provide an inexpensive game machine capable of reducing the design cost.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Example of technical concept in which the drive gear 473 and the notch 422d overlap>
A first gear member and a second gear member that are supported by a base member and have gear teeth engraved on the side surface and are meshed with each other are provided. At least the first gear member is formed from a rotary gear, and the second gear member. Is provided with a plate-shaped portion that is overlaid on the side surface of the gear tooth, and the plate-shaped portion is the gear tooth of the first gear member in the direction of rotation axis of the first gear member and is the second. A gaming machine that is formed so as to be able to overlap the gear teeth that are in mesh with the gear member, and the plate-shaped portion is scooped out from the tooth tip side to the tooth bottom side of the gear teeth of the second gear member. The notch portion to be formed is provided, and the notch portion and the first gear member are arranged at predetermined positions so that at least the first gear member and the plate-shaped portion rotate the first gear member. A game machine A1 characterized in that it is possible to form a specific phase position that is visually recognized at intervals in an axial view.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a plate-shaped portion is formed on the side surface of the gear tooth of one of the pair of gear members to be meshed with each other, so that the inside of the pair of gear members There is a gaming machine that prevents the other gear member, which is the gear member on the opposite side of one gear member, from moving in the axial direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217702). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the other gear member is pulled out, it is necessary to pull out one gear member in advance. Therefore, there is a problem that maintainability is low.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the notch portion is formed in the plate-shaped portion, so that the plate-shaped portion and the first gear member are formed at least at a specific phase position in the direction of the rotation axis of the first gear member. It is visually recognized at intervals. Therefore, at the specific phase position, the first gear member can be pulled out through the notch portion of the plate-shaped portion, so that the first gear member can be replaced without pulling out the second gear member in advance. Therefore, the maintainability of the pair of gear members to be meshed can be improved.

Since the first gear member is formed of a rotary gear, the second gear member on which the plate-shaped portion is formed may be a rotary gear or a rack gear.

In the game machine A1, the notch portion has a forming width on the tooth tip side of the second gear member along the continuous direction of the gear teeth of the second gear member, and the tooth tip of the second gear member. The distance between the point where the outer shape of the first gear member and the tooth tip circle of the first gear member intersect with each other is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the distance of the second gear member along the connecting direction of the gear teeth. Game machine A2.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the period in which the first gear member overlaps the notch portion in the direction of rotation axis of the first gear member can be minimized. Thereby, the action of restricting the movement of the first gear member in the rotation axis direction can be ensured by the plate-shaped portion.

The shape of the notch is not particularly limited, and may be an arc shape or a rectangular shape.

Further, the size of the gear teeth of the second gear member does not have to be uniform. For example, when the second gear member is divided into four in the circumferential direction and the size of the gear teeth (particularly the tooth depth) is different for each divided portion, the tip circle of the small gear teeth and the second gear are formed. By forming the notch at the distance between the points where the outer shape of the tooth tips of the member intersects, the notch is formed as compared with the case where the notch is formed based on the tooth tip circle of the large gear tooth. It is possible to prevent the portion from becoming large. Therefore, the plate-shaped portion can ensure the action of restricting the movement of the first gear member in the direction of the rotation axis. In addition, in the above-mentioned divided portion, there may be a portion where gear teeth are not formed.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the notch portion is a circle formed coaxially with the first gear member and having a diameter slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the first gear member. 1 The gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is formed in an overlapping shape when projected onto the plate-shaped portion from the direction of the rotation axis of the gear member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1 or A2, the notch portion is formed to have a diameter slightly larger than the tooth tip circle of the first gear member, and a circle coaxial with the first gear member is formed. 1 It is formed in an overlapping shape when projected onto a plate-shaped portion from the direction of the rotation axis of the gear member. Therefore, the size of the notch portion can be minimized, the formation area of the plate-shaped portion can be secured to the maximum, and the rigidity of the plate-shaped portion can be improved.

The size of the gear teeth of the second gear member does not have to be uniform. For example, when the second gear member is divided into four in the circumferential direction and the size of the gear teeth (particularly the tooth depth) is different for each divided portion, the tip circle of the small gear teeth and the second gear are formed. By forming the notch at the distance between the points where the outer shape of the tooth tips of the member intersects, the notch is formed as compared with the case where the notch is formed based on the tooth tip circle of the large gear tooth. It is possible to prevent the portion from becoming large. Therefore, the formed area of the plate-shaped portion can be secured to the maximum, and the rigidity of the plate-shaped portion can be improved. In addition, in the above-mentioned divided portion, there may be a portion where gear teeth are not formed.

In the game machine A2 or A3, the gear teeth engraved on the first gear member and the gear teeth engraved on the second gear member are in an appropriate meshing state in which the relationship between the meshing gear teeth is fixed. The proper meshing state thereof is such that the first gear member is moved along the notch formed in the second gear member and is meshed with the second gear member. A game machine A4 characterized by being formed by a tooth.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2 or A3, the first gear member is moved along the outer shape of the notch portion of the plate-shaped portion of the second gear member to move the first gear member and the second gear member. When the gear members are meshed with each other, the gear teeth are meshed in a proper meshed state.

Therefore, when the first gear member and the second gear member are meshed with each other in a proper meshing state, the notch of the plate-shaped portion is used to align the first gear member and the second gear member at the time of meshing. It can be carried out. As a result, the meshing adjustment between the first gear member and the second gear member can be facilitated, so that the maintainability of gear replacement can be improved.

In addition, when the relationship of the teeth in which the first gear member and the second gear member mesh with each other is fixed, the rotating gear member to be meshed is an incomplete gear in which teeth are engraved on a part of the side surface. An example is a case where a moving rack member that reciprocates with respect to a rotating gear member is meshed with each other.

At the time of gear replacement, for example, which tooth of the second gear member the teeth of the first gear member should be meshed with becomes a problem. In this case, the teeth that mesh with each other are in a proper meshing state. In order to make the teeth mesh with each other, it is sufficient to prevent the gear teeth that mesh with each other from shifting by at least one tooth.

A5 of the game machines A1 to A4, characterized in that the movement resistance of at least one gear member of the first gear member or the second gear member increases at least at the specific phase position.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A4, the movement resistance of at least one gear member of the first gear member or the second gear member increases at least at the specific phase position. Therefore, the maintenance worker can easily perform the work of engaging the pair of gear members (fitting the gear members at the proper meshing position) by relying on the increase in the movement resistance.

That is, when the first gear member and the second gear member are stopped in the middle of movement and the notch portion of the plate-shaped portion does not match the first gear member, the first gear member is pulled out. Even if you try, the plate-shaped part becomes an obstacle and cannot be pulled out. Therefore, it is necessary to move the second gear member. In this case, by moving the second gear member to a position where the resistance increases, the notch portion of the plate-shaped portion can be formed at a position matching the first gear member, and the first gear member can be pulled out. Becomes easier.

The movement resistance increases, for example, when a friction member that rubs against at least one of the first gear member or the second gear member is arranged at a specific phase position, or the first gear member or the first gear member at a specific phase position. An example is a case where at least one of the second gear members reaches the end of movement.

In the game machines A1 to A4, the first gear member and the second gear member are formed in such a manner that they are each moved to the end of movement, and the first gear member and the second gear member are arranged at each end of movement. When this is done, the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the plate-shaped portion and the first gear member overlap at least a part in the rotation axis direction view of the first gear member.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A4, when the first gear member and the second gear member are arranged at the end of movement, the rotation axis direction view of the first gear member At least a part of the plate-shaped portion and the first gear member overlap each other. That is, a specific phase position (a state in which the notch portion matches the first gear member) is formed at a position different from the moving end of the first gear member and the second gear member. Therefore, when the first gear member and the second gear member are moved and the first gear member approaches the specific phase position, the first gear member has a sufficient speed in the rotational direction (axis vertical direction). .. Therefore, the wobbling of the first gear member, which tends to occur at a specific phase position, can be alleviated by the momentum in the rotation direction of the first gear member.

In the game machines A1 to A6, a drive motor for generating a driving force is provided, and the first gear member is pivotally supported by the drive motor in a pullable manner, and a layer between the drive motor and the first gear member. The gaming machine A7, wherein the plate-shaped portion is formed on the surface.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A6, the first gear member is pivotally supported by the drive motor in a pullable manner.

Here, even if an attempt is made to engage the first gear member with the second gear member from the side where the plate-shaped portion is formed, the first gear member is brought into contact with the plate-shaped portion and movement is prevented. The gear member and the second gear member cannot be meshed with each other. Therefore, when the first gear member is pivotally supported by the drive motor, the arrangement position of the drive motor may be limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A7, since the first gear member can pass through the notch portion of the plate-shaped portion, the arrangement position of the drive motor is not limited in relation to the plate-shaped portion, and the drive is driven. The degree of freedom in disposing of the motor can be improved.

Further, since the plate-shaped portion of the second gear member is formed in the layer between the drive motor and the first gear member, the drive motor and the first gear member should be removed together when the drive motor is replaced. , You can choose to remove only the drive motor.

That is, the drive motor and the first gear member can be easily separated by pulling out the drive motor while keeping the first gear member in contact with the plate-shaped portion. By exchanging the drive motor in this way, the drive motor can be exchanged while maintaining the meshed state between the first gear member and the second gear member, and the first gear member and the second gear member can be exchanged again. It is possible to eliminate the need for meshing adjustment. This makes it possible to improve maintainability.

When the first gear member is pivotally supported in a manner that allows it to be pulled out from the drive motor, the first gear member is externally fitted and fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor, or is attached to the tip of the drive shaft of the drive motor. An example is an example in which a plurality of pins are projected from the arranged adapter and the plurality of pins are inserted into the first gear member.

In the game machine A7, the first gear member has a shaft portion whose one end is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor and the other end of the shaft portion which is the opposite end of the one end. A rotating body portion connected to an end portion is provided, and the shaft portion and the rotating body portion are formed so as to be separable, and the shaft portion projects in the axial direction from the end surface of the other end portion. The rotating body portion includes a plurality of projecting pins, the rotating body portion includes a plurality of fitting portions into which the plurality of projecting pins are fitted, and the shaft portion and the rotating body portion are connected to each other. The gaming machine A8, characterized in that the projecting pins are formed by being fitted into the plurality of fitting portions.

Here, in order to bring the first gear member into contact with the plate-shaped portion and pull it out directly from the drive shaft of the drive motor, a force greater than the static friction generated between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member is required. Then, a force equal to or greater than the static friction is applied to the second gear member through the plate-shaped portion that comes into contact with the first gear member. Since the static friction is set to be large in order to maintain the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member, the plate-shaped portion may be deformed or excessive stress may be applied to the drive motor. ..

On the other hand, according to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, a plurality of protrusion pins are projected at the end of the shaft portion fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor, and the protrusion pins project into the rotating body portion. A plurality of fitting portions into which the setting pins are fitted are formed. That is, by engaging the shaft portion and the rotating body portion at a plurality of points, the phase relationship between the drive shaft of the drive motor and the first gear member can be maintained without increasing the static friction.

Therefore, the force required to separate the drive motor and the rotating body portion of the first gear member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the plate-shaped portion of the second gear member from being deformed or excessive stress being applied to the drive motor.

Examples of the fitting portion include a through hole and a recess formed in a bottomed tubular shape.

In the game machine A7 or A8, the drive motor is arranged close to the drive motor and is extended along the side surface of the motor case of the drive motor in a direction opposite to the extension direction of the drive shaft of the drive motor. A game machine A9 characterized by having a regulation unit.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7 or A8, when the drive motor is pulled out from the first gear member, the drive motor is pressed against the regulation portion extending along the side surface of the drive motor. Can be pulled out. As a result, it is possible to suppress the axial center of the drive motor from tilting with respect to the first gear member, and it is possible to suppress the deformation of the first gear member.

In the game machine A9, the restricting portions are formed in pairs with the motor case of the drive motor sandwiched between them, and the extending end of one of the regulating portions in the pair of restricting portions is the motor case of the drive motor. A10 is a gaming machine A10, which is formed on the drive shaft side from an end surface on the opposite side of the end surface on which the drive shaft is arranged.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of the game machine A9, the extended end of one of the regulation parts formed in a pair is formed on the drive shaft side of the end face of the motor case of the drive motor. Therefore, the extended end of one of the regulating portions can be effectively used as a fulcrum for pulling out the drive motor. That is, since the extension end of the regulation portion and the side surface of the drive motor are arranged adjacent to each other, the extension end of the regulation portion is used as a fulcrum and the side surface of the drive motor is used as a fulcrum when a force is applied to the drive motor. The distance to the point of action can be minimized. As a result, the force required for pulling out can be suppressed.

Further, when the drive motor is pulled out with the extended end of one of the regulating portions as a fulcrum, the drive motor can be pulled out while pressing the drive motor against the regulating portion on the opposite side of the one regulating portion. As a result, it is possible to suppress the degree of inclination of the drive motor with respect to the other gear when the drive motor is pulled out.

In the game machine A10, of the pair of regulation parts, the other regulation part, which is the opposite side of the one regulation part, protrudes in the same manner as the extended end part of the one regulation part, or The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that it is formed so as to project from the extended end of one of the regulating portions to the opposite side of the drive shaft of the drive motor.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect of the game machine A11, the other restricting portion to which the drive motor is pressed when the drive motor is pulled out is closer to the drive shaft of the drive motor than the extended end of at least one of the restricting portions. It is formed by overhanging to the opposite side. Therefore, when the drive motor is pulled out with the extended end of one regulating portion as a fulcrum, the point of action is closest to the other regulating section (that is, the point of action is a plane perpendicular to the drive axis of the drive motor). In a state where it is arranged on a flat surface including the extended end of one regulating portion), the movement of the drive motor can be prevented by the other regulating portion.

This makes it possible to reliably prevent the drive motor from moving in a direction away from one of the regulating portions when the drive motor is pulled out.

The game machines A7 to A11 include a moving contact member that is arranged so as to face the second gear member with the first gear member interposed therebetween, and the moving contact member is the first gear member at the specific phase position. It is arranged at a distance from the first gear member in the axial view, and the plate-shaped portion of the second gear member overlaps the first gear member in the axial direction of the first gear member. The gaming machine A12 is characterized in that, in at least one of the states, the first gear member and the moving contact member overlap each other in the axial direction of the first gear member.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effects of the game machines A7 to A11, the first gear member simultaneously attaches to the plate-shaped portion of the second gear member and the moving contact member arranged to face the second gear member. Be abutted. As a result, the inclination of the first gear member when the first gear member is pulled out from the drive motor can be suppressed.

<Example of technical concept in which the starting gear tooth 452b1 for meshing is formed in a large size>
A driving gear member formed as a rotary gear and a driven gear member whose meshing is started during rotation of the driving gear member are provided, and at least one of the driving gear member and the driven gear member is hit at the start of meshing. A game characterized in that a meshing tooth to be in contact and an intermediate tooth that meshes when the meshing teeth are continued after the meshing tooth is engaged are provided, and the meshing tooth is formed larger than the intermediate tooth. Machine B1.

Here, there is a gaming machine in which meshing between the main gear member and the driven gear member (the side on which the rotation of the main gear member is transmitted) is started during the rotation of the main gear member (the side rotated by the drive motor). (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-244210). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the teeth that mesh with each other at the start of meshing between the main gear member and the driven gear member are easily damaged due to a collision at the beginning of meshing. On the other hand, if the gear teeth are enlarged, the gear teeth can be prevented from being damaged, but the backlash becomes large and it becomes difficult to smoothly rotate the driven gear member. Therefore, it has been difficult to achieve both durability and smooth rotation.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the meshing teeth are formed larger than the intermediate teeth, at least one of the main gear member and the driven gear member has the durability of the meshing teeth that mesh with each other at the start of meshing. It is improved and can prevent damage to the meshing teeth. In addition, since the backlash between the main gear member and the driven gear member can be reduced in the intermediate teeth, the rotation of the driven gear member during continuous meshing in which the intermediate teeth are meshed after the meshing teeth are meshed can be made smooth. can do. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the meshing teeth and the smoothness of rotation of the driven gear member at the same time.

The start of meshing means a state in which the meshing teeth formed on at least one of the driving gear member and the driven gear member start to come into contact with the other gear member on the opposite side of the one gear member.

Further, forming the meshing teeth in a large size means forming at least one of the tooth width, the tooth thickness or the tooth depth larger than that of the intermediate teeth.

The game machine B1 is characterized in that the game machine B1 is provided with a holding mechanism for holding the posture of the driven gear member.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, a holding mechanism for holding the posture of the driven gear member is provided, so that the posture of the driven gear member is stabilized in a state where the driven gear member is not meshed with the main gear member. Can be done.

Examples of the holding mechanism include a mechanism for sandwiching and holding the driven gear member in the axial direction, a mechanism for holding the driven gear member by mechanical alignment, and the like.

In the game machine B2, the driven gear member is provided with a notch portion that is cut out in a direction of retracting from the driving gear member, and the notch portion is brought into contact with the outer periphery of the driving gear member at at least two points. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the holding mechanism is formed by the above.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, a holding mechanism for holding the driven gear member can be formed by abutting the driven gear member and the driven gear member at two points. As a result, it is not necessary to dispose of another member for holding the posture of the driven gear member.

The notch portion may have a shape that does not interfere with the tooth tip circle of the driving gear member, and the shape is not limited, but at least the radius of curvature of the notch portion is that of the tooth tip circle of the driving gear member. It is formed below the radius.

In the game machine B3, the game machine B4 is characterized in that the notch portion is formed as an arcuate concave portion circumscribing the driving gear member.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the notch portion of the driven gear member is brought into contact with the outer periphery of the main gear member on a surface, thereby improving the effect of maintaining the posture of the driven gear member. Can be made to.

That is, the notch portion of the driven gear member is brought into contact with the outer periphery of the driving gear member on a surface, thereby suppressing the frictional force at the time of contact from being concentrated in one place, and the frictional force is applied to the entire notch portion. Can be dispersed. As a result, the number of places where the driven gear member is held by the driven gear member can be increased, and the effect of maintaining the posture of the driven gear member can be improved.

The mode in which the notch portion is circumscribed to the driving gear member is not particularly limited. That is, for example, it may be a mode in which the gear teeth are circumscribed to the tooth tip circle of the driving gear member, or a surface in which the gear teeth are omitted is formed on the driving gear member and circumscribed on the omitted surface.

In the game machine B4, the contact point between the driving gear member and the notch portion of the driven gear member is drawn from the central axis of the driving gear member to the surface connecting the tooth bottoms of the driven gear member. A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is formed on at least both sides of a perpendicular line.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the contact point between the main gear member and the notch portion of the driven gear member is on the surface where the tooth bottom of the driven gear member is connected from the central axis of the driven gear member. Since it is formed on at least both sides of the drawn perpendicular line, it is possible to prevent the driven gear member from rotating (moving) in both directions in a state where the notch is in contact with the main gear member.

Examples of the driven gear member include a rotary gear member formed as a rotary gear, a rack gear formed as a gear that moves in parallel, and the like.

In any of the game machines B2 to B5, the driven gear member includes an engaging protrusion receiving portion formed larger than the meshing tooth, and the notch portion is formed in the engaging protrusion receiving portion. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the engagement between the driving gear member and the driven gear member is started after the meshing teeth of the driving gear member and the engaging protrusion receiving portion come into contact with each other. ..

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the driven gear member is durable by using the engaging protrusion receiving portion as a substitute for the tooth abutted on the driving gear member. The sex can be improved.

The engaging projectile receiving portion in which the notch is formed is not a part that originally plays a role of engaging with the gear teeth of the driving gear member, but is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the driving gear member to form a posture of the driven gear member. It is a part of the role of maintaining. Therefore, unlike the gear teeth, the size is not limited according to the size of the gear teeth to be meshed. Therefore, the durability of the driven gear member is improved by using the engaging protrusion receiving portion, which is formed stronger than the gear tooth, at the portion where the main gear member and the driven gear member come into contact with each other at the start of meshing. Can be made to.

In the game machine B6, the driving gear member includes a recessed portion which is a recess formed adjacent to the meshing tooth, and the meshing tooth of the driving gear member is brought into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion. The gaming machine B7, wherein the driven gear member is rotated in such a manner that the engaging protrusion receiving portion enters the recessed portion.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B6, the drive gear member is rotated before the meshing teeth of the drive gear member come into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion of the drive gear member, so that the drive gear member is rotated. The impact at the start of meshing with the driven gear member can be suppressed.

Here, when the driven gear member is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the driven gear member at two points, the posture of the driven gear member is maintained even if the driven gear member rotates. On the other hand, when the meshing teeth of the main gear member are close to the engaging protrusion receiving portion of the driven gear member, the recessed portion formed adjacent to the engaging protrusion faces the engaging protrusion receiving portion. Since the recessed portion does not come into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion, the effect of maintaining the posture of the driven gear member is released. Then, the driven gear member is slightly rotated by the frictional force generated between the outer peripheral surface of the main gear member and the engaging protrusion receiving portion, and the engaging protruding receiving portion enters the recessed portion. As a result, the driven gear member starts rotating before the meshing teeth of the driven gear member are brought into contact with the engaging protrusion receiving portion of the driven gear member, so that the driven gear member and the driven gear member start meshing with each other. It is possible to suppress the impact when doing so.

<Example of technical concept in which the protruding gear member 7452e moves in the radial direction of the double-layer gear 7452>
A drive source that generates a driving force, a driving gear member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving source, a first moving member that is moved in conjunction with the rotation of the driving gear member, and a rotation of the driving gear member. The driven gear member that starts moving in conjunction with the driven gear member on the way, the second moving member that moves in conjunction with the movement of the driven gear member, and the driven gear member and the driven gear member are interlocked with each other. The first moving member is moved within a moving range from the moving base end to the moving end, and the driven gear member starts moving in conjunction with the driving gear member by the adjusting device. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that a plurality of positions of the first moving member can be formed at the time.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a first moving member and a second moving member that are moved by a driving force of a single driving source (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-125022). ). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that there are few variations in the effect because the mode of the second moving member at a specific position during the movement of the first moving member is limited to one.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since the adjusting device can form a plurality of positions of the first moving member when the driven gear member starts to move in conjunction with the driving gear member, the second moving gear member is linked with the driven gear member. A plurality of positions of the first moving member when the moving member starts to move can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to form a plurality of variations of the effects of the first moving member and the second moving member.

When the driven gear member starts to move in conjunction with the driven gear member, the driven gear member is moved by engaging the driven gear member and the driven gear member, or the driven gear member and the driven gear member are driven. The mode in which the driven gear member is moved by the friction generated between the gear members, or the magnetic force generated between the driven gear member and the driven gear member when the driven gear member and the driven gear member are formed of a magnetic material. An embodiment in which the driven gear member is moved is exemplified.

Further, as the forming mode of the adjusting device, at least one gear tooth of the driving gear member or the driven gear member is formed so as to be able to project in a direction away from the rotation axis, and between the shafts of the driving gear member and the driven gear member. An embodiment in which the distance can be changed is exemplified.

In the game machine C1, the interlocking of the driving gear member and the driven gear member is due to the meshing, and the adjusting device is arranged on the driving gear member and moves in the radial direction of the driving gear member. The projecting member is provided with a possible projecting member, and the projecting member is in an overhanging state in which the driven gear member is projected from the rotational direction of the driven gear member to a position where it can be contacted, and is in contact with the driven gear member from the rotational direction. It is possible to form an immersive state that is arranged at an impossible position, and when the main gear member rotates while the protruding member forms the overhanging state, the protruding member comes into contact with the driven gear member. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the engagement between the driving gear member and the driven gear member is started.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the way in which the main gear member and the driven gear member are interlocked differs depending on whether the protruding member of the adjusting device is in the overhanging state or the immersive state. Can be made.

Here, the start and release of the meshing between the driving gear member and the driven gear member can also be performed by changing the distance between the axes of the driving gear member and the driven gear member. However, in that case, in order to suppress the meshing resistance between the driving gear member and the driven gear member, it is necessary to move the rotating shaft in the direction perpendicular to the axis while maintaining the parallelism of the rotating shaft, and the accuracy of the moving parallelism is improved. Required. Therefore, the mechanism for moving the main gear member and the driven gear member may be complicated.

On the other hand, in the game machine C2, the main gear member is provided with a protruding member formed so as to be movable in the radial direction, and when the protruding member overhangs (when forming an overhanging state), the main gear member and the driven gear The meshing with the member is started. Therefore, it is not necessary to move the rotation shafts of the main gear member and the driven gear member, so that the parallelism of the rotation shafts is maintained. Therefore, accuracy is not required for the mechanism for moving the protruding member, and the mechanism for moving the protruding member can be simplified.

As a method of forming the projecting member in an overhanging state, a method of projecting the projecting member by centrifugal force generated when the main gear member is rotated, or a method in which a solenoid is arranged inside the projecting member and driven by the solenoid. An example is a method of projecting a protruding member. Further, the number of protruding members may be one or a plurality.

In the game machine C2, the protruding member receives the urging force generated toward the rotation shaft side of the driving gear member to form the immersive state at least in the stationary state of the driving gear member, and rotates the driving gear member. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to switch between the immersive state and the overhanging state by switching the rotation speed to be caused.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, by making the rotation speed of the main gear member different, the protruding member is in contact with the driven gear member, and the protruding member is in contact with the driven gear member. It is possible to switch between the immersive state of idling.

As a result, the control of the operating speed of the drive source and the state of the projecting member can be interlocked with each other. Therefore, as compared with the case where the projecting member is projected by the solenoid, for example, the drive gear member and the driven gear member are interlocked. Control can be simplified.

Examples of the member that generates the urging force include elastic springs such as coil springs and torsion springs, and members made of a rubber material having sufficient elasticity.

Further, a plurality of protruding members may be arranged on the main gear member in different phases. In this case, the amount of protrusion of each protruding member can be adjusted by adjusting the weight of each protruding member and the urging force acting on each protruding member.

In the game machine C2 or C3, the projecting member includes a first projecting member and a second projecting member formed in phase with the first projecting member, and the first projecting member and the second projecting member thereof. The amount of protrusion due to the rotation of the driving gear member is substantially the same, and the driving gear member has the first rotational speed at which the first protruding member and the second protruding member form the immersive state, and the first The 1-protruding member and the 2nd protruding member can form a second rotation speed that forms the overhanging state, and the rotation speed of the driving gear member is defined as the first rotation speed and the second rotation speed. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that it can be switched between the two during the rotation of the driving gear member.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2 or C3, the phase at which the first protruding member starts to come into contact with the driven gear member by changing the rotation speed of the main gear member during rotation, and the first The driving gear member can be brought into contact with the driven gear member in at least two kinds of phases, which is the phase at which the protruding member starts to come into contact with the driven gear member.

That is, by rotating the main gear member at the first rotation speed and changing the rotation speed of the main gear member to the second rotation speed immediately before the first protruding member is positioned on the driven gear member side, the second rotation speed is obtained. The meshing with the driven gear member can be started by one protruding member. On the other hand, the main gear member is rotated at the first rotation speed, and the rotation speed of the main gear member is changed to the second rotation speed immediately before the second protruding member is positioned on the driven gear member side. Then, the second protruding member can start the meshing with the driven gear member.

In other words, by arbitrarily selecting the timing for increasing the rotational speed of the driving gear member, the timing for projecting and immersing the protruding member can be arbitrarily selected. That is, even if the moving speed of the first moving member at the start of movement is the same, the timing of moving the second moving member can be changed by the timing of increasing the moving speed of the first moving member. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the subsequent effect only by checking the speed at the start of movement of the first moving member, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the movement of the first moving member and the second moving member. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the first moving member and the second moving member.

When the first projecting member and the second projecting member project with substantially the same amount of projecting, the masses of the first projecting member and the second projecting member are equal and act on each of them. When the forces are the same, or because the masses of the first protruding member and the second protruding member are different, the radial outward force generated by the rotation of the main gear member is different, but each protrusion is in a manner that eliminates the difference. An example is a case where the urging force acting on the member is changed. For example, when the urging force is generated by the elastic spring, the spring constants of the elastic spring that gives the urging force to the first protruding member and the elastic spring that gives the urging force to the second protruding member are changed.

In the game machine C2 or C3, the protruding member is formed in phase with the first protruding member and the first protruding member thereof, and the first protruding member becomes the driven gear member during the rotation of the main gear member. A second protruding member that is close to the driven gear member after being brought close to the member is provided, and the first protruding member and the second protruding member are formed so that the amount of protrusion that is projected by the rotation of the driving gear member is different. In the driven gear member, among the projecting members, the first projecting member forms an embedded state, and the second projecting member forms the overhanging state, and the separated rotational speed, and the first projecting member and The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that both of the second projecting members can form a joint rotation speed that forms the overhanging state.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2 or C3, the state in which the first protruding member is brought into contact with the driven gear member without changing the rotational speed of the main gear member during rotation, and the second It is possible to form a state in which the protruding member is in contact with the driven gear member.

That is, when the driving gear member is rotated at a constant speed at the separated rotation speed, the driving gear member starts meshing with the driven gear member at the second protruding member. On the other hand, when the driving gear member is rotated at the joint rotation speed, the driving gear member starts meshing with the driven gear member by the first protruding member.

That is, in order to change the position of the first moving member when the second moving member starts moving, it is not necessary to change the rotation speed of the driving source during the rotation of the driving gear member, so that the control of the driving source is simple. Can be transformed into.

<Characteristic D group> (Notify that you were able to win a prize by detouring)
A ball-entry means capable of entering a game ball, a privilege-giving means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the ball-entry means, and a game ball to the ball-entry means. A variable means that can be changed to an open position that allows the ball to enter and a regulated position that regulates the entry of the game ball, and the variable means from the regulated position to the open position based on the establishment of a specific condition. A specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which an opening operation that is variable until a predetermined condition is satisfied is set multiple times, and a specific game execution means.
When the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means, the ball entry assisting means that facilitates the entry of the game ball on the regulated position of the variable means into the ball entry means in the subsequent opening operation. A game machine D1 characterized by having and.

Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine equipped with a symbol display device as one of the game machines, and in this pachinko machine, the start condition is satisfied by the game ball entering the start port, and the symbol of the symbol display device fluctuates. If the stop symbol after the start and the end of the fluctuation is a combination of predetermined symbols, a big hit will occur, a special gaming state advantageous to the player will occur, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Specifically, in the special gaming state, the large winning opening of the variable winning device is opened for a predetermined time (or the time until a predetermined number of prizes are won) and then closed, and the opening / closing operation is performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16). It is repeated only once). By winning a game ball in the open large prize opening, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-700). However, when the opening and closing operation is repeatedly performed for such a game machine, the game ball that has reached the variable winning device during the closing operation cannot enter the ball, and the launched game ball is wasted. There was a problem that it would reduce the interest of the player. The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and a game machine capable of suppressing the waste of the game ball launched by the player and improving the interest of the player. It is intended to be provided.

According to the game machine D1, even if the game ball has flowed down to the regulated position of the variable means, the ball entry assisting means makes it easier to enter the ball entry means at the next and subsequent open positions, so that the ball enters the entry means. There is an effect that the number of non-balling game balls can be suppressed and the player's interest can be improved.

In the game machine D1, the ball entry assisting means has a taxiway for guiding the game ball on the regulated position of the variable means to a position where the ball entry means can enter the ball. Machine D2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the ball entry assisting means has a taxiway for guiding the game ball on the regulated position of the variable means to a position where the ball can enter the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of game balls entering the ball entry means can be increased.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the ball entry assisting means reduces the flow rate so as to flow down within a range in which the ball entry means can enter the ball until the variable means is changed to the open position. The gaming machine D3, characterized in that it has a means for reducing the flow speed to cause the flow.

According to the game machine D3, in the game machine D1 or D2, the flow speed is reduced so that the game ball flows down within the range in which the ball can enter the ball entry means until the variable means is changed to the open position. Since the ball entry assisting means has the flow-down speed reducing means for causing the ball to flow down, there is an effect that more game balls can be inserted into the ball entry means.

A first detecting means for detecting a game ball that could not be entered because the variable means is in the regulated position when the specific game is executed in any of the game machines D1 to D3. , A second detecting means capable of detecting a game ball when the game ball detected by the first detecting means enters the ball entering means by the ball entering assisting means, and a game ball by the first detecting means. Has an effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the detection of the first effect and executing a second effect different from the first effect when the game ball is detected by the second detection means. A game machine D4 characterized by being.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D3, the following effect is played. That is, when the specific game is being executed, the first detecting means detects the game ball that could not be entered because the variable means is in the regulated position. When the game ball detected by the first detection means enters the ball entry means by the ball entry assisting means, the game ball is detected by the second detection means. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first detection means, the first effect is executed by the effect execution means. Further, when the game ball is detected by the second detecting means, the second effect different from the first effect is executed by the effect executing means. As a result, when a game ball enters the ball entry means by the player, whether or not the game ball that did not originally enter the ball enters the entry means by the entry assisting means is executed by the effect executing means. It can be determined by the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can recognize that the player is advantageous by the second effect.

The game machine D4 has a display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, and the effect executing means has a first effect mode corresponding to the first effect and a second effect mode corresponding to the second effect. The gaming machine D5, which is configured to be able to be displayed by at least the display means.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D4, the display means displays the effect modes corresponding to the first effect and the second effect, so that the meaning of the effect can be recognized more easily. effective.

In the game machine D4 or D5, the second effect suggests that the ball is a game ball that has entered the ball entry means by the ball entry assisting means even though the ball entry means is in the restricted position. A game machine D6 characterized in that it is composed of a production to be performed.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D4 or D5, it is possible to recognize that the game ball that was in the regulated position by the second effect has entered the ball entry means by the ball entry assisting means. It has the effect of improving the interest of the person.

Based on a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the second detection means when the specific game is being executed in any of the game machines D4 to D6, and a count value by the counting means. A game machine D7 having a notification means for notifying a notification mode.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D4 to D6, the number detected by the second detection means is notified by the notification means, so that the number of game balls which is advantageous to the player. Has the effect of being able to discriminate.

In any of the game machines D4 to D7, when a game ball is detected by the first detection means, it has a discriminating means for determining whether or not the detected game ball has entered the ball entry means. The effect executing means is characterized in that, when it is determined by the discriminating means that the game ball has not entered, the effect executing means executes a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect. Game machine D8 to play.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D7, the third effect is that the game ball that could not be entered due to the regulated position could not finally enter the ball entry means. There is an effect that it can be recognized by the player and the game can be sharpened.

In the game machines D1 to D8, at least the above-mentioned specific game type determining means for determining the type of the specific game executed by the specific game executing means and the specific game type determined by the specific game type determining means. The game machine D9 is characterized in that the specific game having a different execution interval of the opening operation has a specific game storage means in which a plurality of the specific games are stored.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effects played by the game machines D1 to D8, as the type of the specific game, the type in which the execution interval of the opening operation is different is set, so that the ball can be easily entered by the ball entry assisting means. There is an effect that it can be changed depending on the type of specific game.

In the game machine D10, in the specific game stored in the specific game storage means, the first specificity in which the execution interval is set so that the game ball is easily entered into the ball entry means by the ball entry assisting means. The game is characterized in that it includes a game and a second specific game in which the execution interval is smaller than that of the first specific game, in which the game ball is more likely to be entered into the ball entry means by the ball entry assisting means. The game machine D11.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effect of the game machine D10, there is an effect that the ease of entering a ball by the ball entry assisting means can be changed according to the type of the specific game.

In the game machine D11, the game machine D12 is characterized in that the first specific game and the second specific game are set so that the number of times of the opening operation is different.

According to the game machine D12, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D11, it is possible to make a difference in the value between the first specific game and the second specific game, and there is an effect that the game can be given more sharpness. ..

<Feature E group> (Jump-up bonus winning control)
A ball-entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a privilege-giving means that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the ball-entry means, and the ball-entry means. A variable means that can be changed between an open position where the ball can enter and a regulated position that regulates the entry of the game ball, and an opening that changes the variable means from the restricted position to the open position based on the establishment of a specific condition. It is determined by the specific game execution means for executing the specific game in which the operation is set a plurality of times, the specific game type determination means for determining the type of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means, and the specific game type determination means. The game machine E1 is characterized in that, as the specific game, at least a plurality of storage means in which the specific game having a different opening operation pattern is stored is provided.

Here, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine equipped with a symbol display device as one of the game machines, and in this pachinko machine, the start condition is satisfied by the game ball entering the start port, and the symbol of the symbol display device fluctuates. If the stop symbol after the start and the end of the fluctuation is a combination of predetermined symbols, a big hit will occur, a special gaming state advantageous to the player will occur, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Specifically, in the special gaming state, the large winning opening of the variable winning device is opened for a predetermined time (or the time until a predetermined number of prizes are won) and then closed, and the opening / closing operation is performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16). It is repeated only once). By winning a game ball in the open large prize opening, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-700). On the other hand, there is a problem that the opening pattern of the variable winning device is constant, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from getting bored with a game at an early stage.

According to the game machine E1, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball-entry means into which the game ball can enter. The ball entry means is changed by an open position where the game ball can enter, a regulated position which regulates the entry of the game ball, and a variable means. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the specific game executing means executes the specific game in which the opening operation for changing the variable means from the regulated position to the open position is set a plurality of times. The type of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means is determined by the specific game type determination means. As the specific game determined by the specific game type determining means, at least a plurality of specific games having different patterns of opening operations are stored by the storage means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

In the game machine E1, when the specific game is being executed, the ball entry assisting means that facilitates the entry of the game ball on the regulated position of the variable means into the ball entry means in the subsequent opening operation. The gaming machine E2, which is characterized by having.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, when a specific game is being executed, the game ball on the regulated position of the variable means is opened by the ball entry assisting means in the next and subsequent opening operations. Since it is easy to enter the ball, there is an effect that it can be more advantageous to the player.

In the game machine E2, in the plurality of specific games stored in the storage means, when the variable means is changed to the open position, the game ball enters the ball entry means by the entry assisting means. The first specific game in which a large number of advantageous opening operation patterns, which is one of the patterns of the opening operation, and the second specific game in which the advantageous opening operation patterns are smaller than those of the first specific game are included. A game machine E3 characterized by being set at least.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E2, a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous than that can be set, so that the game is given a sharpness. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine E3, in the first specific game, after the advantageous opening operation pattern is executed a predetermined number of times, the variable means is changed to the opening position in a period longer than the opening operation in the advantageous opening operation pattern. The opening operation is set at least once, and in the second specific game, the game ball is inserted into the ball entry assisting means by the ball entry assisting means a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that it is composed of an opening operation of a disadvantageous opening operation pattern that makes it difficult to perform.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E3, a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous than that can be set, so that the game is given a sharpness. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine E4, a detection means capable of detecting a game ball entered into the ball entry means by the ball entry assisting means, and an effect of executing a specific effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. A game machine E5 characterized by having an executing means.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, the player executes a specific effect based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the ball entry means by the ball entry assisting means. There is an effect that it is possible to easily notify that the state has become advantageous.

In the game machine E5, in the first specific game, after the advantageous opening operation pattern of the predetermined number of times, before the next opening operation is executed, the execution interval of other opening operations is larger than the execution interval. A long long interval is set, and in the second specific game, after the disadvantageous opening operation pattern of the predetermined number of times, the end period of the specific game of the long interval or more is set. A game machine E6 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E5, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the first specific game and the second specific game up to a predetermined number of opening operation patterns. Has the effect of being able to expect whether it is the first specific game or the second specific game.

In the game machine E6, with the ball entry effect executing means for executing the effect based on the detection result of the game ball by the detection means during the first specific game or the second specific game at the long interval and the end period. The gaming machine E7, which is characterized by having.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, the following effects are played. That is, it is possible to identify whether the game is the first specific game or the second specific game by the effect executed at the long interval and the end period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the specific game becomes monotonous.

<Feature F group> (SW pressing table switching)
An operation receiving means for accepting an operation by a player, a period setting means for setting an effective period during which the operation receiving means can accept the operation, and an effect when the operation is received by the operation receiving means are executed. The effect execution means to be performed, the effect selection means for selecting the effect to be executed by the effect execution means, the storage means for storing the plurality of the effects selected by the effect selection means, and the storage means thereof. A specific effect is stored as one of the plurality of effects, and the specific effect has a probability variable means for varying the probability of being selected by the selection means within the valid period. The featured game machine F1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game machine that develops a game while causing a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter abbreviated as “LCD”) to perform an effect display is the mainstream. What kind of effect is performed is determined, for example, at the timing when the ball bounced into the game area enters the starting port. That is, at the timing when the ball enters the starting port, it is determined which pattern is produced, how and for how many seconds, and what the effect result is. Then, the effect pattern is instructed from the main control device that controls the game to the display control device that controls the display, and the effect display instructed by the display control device is performed. Since the effect pattern is an instruction for a series of effect display of the effect pattern, as a result, the effect pattern also includes an instruction for the time required for the effect display (Patent Document 1). This is because it is predetermined how many seconds it takes for a series of effect displays. In recent years, many pachinko machines with player participation have been developed. These request a button operation during a predetermined effect period, and develop different effects depending on the timing of the button operation. For example, a variable display of a symbol is displayed in a part of the effect display, the variable display is stopped in response to a button operation, and a so-called jackpot or the like is generated according to the stop result (the effect display is performed). For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-350846). However, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by performing a wide variety of other effects by operating the buttons. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the game machine F1, the operation by the player is accepted by the operation receiving means. The validity period during which the operation can be accepted by the operation receiving means is set by the period setting means. When the operation is received by the operation receiving means, the effect is executed by the effect executing means. The effect executed by the effect execution means is selected by the effect selection means. A plurality of effects selected by the effect selection means are stored by the storage means. A specific effect is stored in the storage means as one of a plurality of effects, and the probability that the specific effect is selected by the selection means is changed by the probability variable means within the valid period. As a result, when the player performs the operation, the probability that the specific effect is selected can be set to be different, so that the game can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine F1, the storage means stores a plurality of effect groups composed of the plurality of effects having different selection rates of the specific effect, and the probability setting means is stored in the storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that one effect group is set out of a plurality of effect groups, and the effect selection means selects an effect from the effect group set by the probability setting means. F2.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F1, the selection rate of a specific effect can be changed by switching and setting the effect group by the probability setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the selection probability of the specific effect can be easily changed.

The game machine F2 has a counting means for counting the number of times an operation is received by the operation receiving means, and the probability setting means switches and sets the effect group based on the count of the counting means. A game machine F3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine F3, since the production group is switched according to the number of times the operation is accepted, there is an effect that the player can give the game a fresh taste by performing the operation.

In the game machine F2 or F3, the game machine F4 is characterized in that the probability setting means is set by switching the effect group based on the remaining period of the period set by the period setting means.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F2 or F3, the effect group is switched by the probability setting means based on the remaining period set by the period setting means, so that the taste of the game is changed by the change of the valid period. It has the effect of being able to make different things.

In any of the game machines F2 to F4, when an operation is received by the operation receiving means, it has a history storage means capable of storing the reception history, and the probability setting means is stored in the history storage means. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the effect group is switched and set based on the reception history.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of playing any of the game machines F2 to F4, since the production group is switched according to the reception history, there is an effect that the probability can be changed according to the operation of the player.

<Characteristic G group> (Notify the SW validity period with a character controlled by a voice lamp)
A game having a first control means for executing control of the game, a second control means for executing control of the game based on a control signal from the first control means, and an operation unit that can be operated by the player. In the machine, the first control means receives the operation by the second control means based on the reception means for receiving the operation of the operation unit by the player and the operation received by the reception means. A reception transmission means for transmitting the reception signal to be indicated, a period setting means for setting a valid period during which the player's operation can be received by the reception means, and an effective signal indicating the valid period set by the period setting means. The notification mode indicating that the operation of the operation unit has been effectively set based on the valid signal transmitting means capable of transmitting to the second control means and the valid period set by the period setting means. Based on the notification means for notifying the above, the operating means capable of operating at least the first state and the second state different from the second state, and the start of the valid period set by the period setting means, the operating means. The second control means has a display means capable of displaying the effect mode and a display control means for causing the display means to display the effect mode. The display control means causes the display means to display a predetermined effect mode based on the reception signal received from the reception transmission means, and is transmitted from the effective signal transmission means. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the display means is displayed with an effect mode indicating the valid period based on the valid signal.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game machine that develops a game while causing a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter abbreviated as “LCD”) to perform an effect display is the mainstream. What kind of effect is performed is determined, for example, at the timing when the ball bounced into the game area enters the starting port. That is, at the timing when the ball enters the starting port, it is determined which pattern is produced, how and for how many seconds, and what the effect result is. Then, the effect pattern is instructed from the main control device that controls the game to the display control device that controls the display, and the effect display instructed by the display control device is performed. Since the effect pattern is an instruction for a series of effect display of the effect pattern, as a result, the effect pattern also includes an instruction for the time required for the effect display (Patent Document 1). Here, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a player is provided with a button that can be operated by the player, and the player operates the button to display a notice effect such as a character on a liquid crystal display device. In such a game machine, when the operating means is operated, the valid period on which the notice effect or the like is displayed is displayed to the player on the liquid crystal display device or the like (for example, Patent Document 1: Special Patent Document 1: Kai 2000-350846 (Japanese Patent Publication No. 2000-350846). However, if the display control device or the like that controls the display device does not discriminate the input of the operating means or manage the valid period, the displayed valid period and the actual valid period will be different from each other, and the player's There was a problem that it lowered the interest. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the game machine G1, the control of the game is controlled by the first control means. The game is controlled by the second control means based on the control signal from the first control means. In the first control means, the operation of the operation unit by the player is accepted by the reception means. Based on the fact that the operation has been accepted by the reception means, a reception signal indicating that the operation has been accepted by the second control means is transmitted by the reception transmission means. The validity period during which the player's operation can be received by the reception means is set by the period setting means. An effective signal indicating an effective period set by the period setting means is transmitted to the second control means by the effective signal transmitting means. Based on the valid period set by the period setting means, the notification means notifies the notification mode indicating that the operation of the operation unit is effectively set. It is operated by the actuating means at least in a first state and a second state different from the second state. Based on the start of the valid period set by the period setting means, the operating means is operated by the operation controlling means from the first state to the second state. In the second control means, the effect mode is displayed by the display means. The effect mode is displayed on the display means by the display control means. Based on the reception signal received from the reception transmission means, the display control means displays a predetermined effect mode on the display means by the display control means. Based on the valid signal transmitted from the valid signal transmitting means, the display means displays an effect mode indicating the valid period. As a result, the operating means operates in the second state even when there is a discrepancy between the notification mode for notifying the effective period operated by the second control means and the effect mode indicating the effective period controlled by the second control means. The validity period can be identified by the timing at which it is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize the validity period and can improve the interest of the game.

The game machine G1 has a main control means capable of outputting a control signal for controlling the game to the first control means, and the main control means executes a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions. Based on the lottery means, the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means on the display means, and the establishment of the start condition, the first (1) The control means has an output means capable of outputting a start signal for starting the dynamic display of the identification information in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The game machine characterized in that the period setting means of the first control means sets the valid period within the determined dynamic display period based on the reception of the start signal. G2.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the validity period is set within the dynamic display period based on the start signal received by the main control means that controls the first control means, so that the validity period is set more accurately. There is an effect that the validity period can be set.

In the game machine G2
The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the valid signal transmitting means transmits the valid signal to the second control means before the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, an effective signal is transmitted to the second control means by the effective transmission means before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, so that the valid period It has the effect of being able to determine the start of.

A game machine G4 in any of the game machines G1 to G3, wherein the operating means is operated in a specific state different from the second state before the start of the valid period.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G3, the operating means is operated in a specific state before the start of the valid period, so that the player knows in advance that the valid period will start. It has the effect of being able to notify.

In the game machine G4, the operating means is provided so that an operating portion that operates is arranged on the front side overlapping the display area of the display means, and the display control means of the second control means has the effective period. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the display means is displayed with a specific effect mode within a period overlapping with a period during which the operating means is operated in the specific state before the start of the above.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G4, by arranging the operating means and the display means in close proximity to each other, it is easy to recognize the notification of the validity period by the display means and the notification by the operating means. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine G5, the specific effect mode is an effect in which specific symbol information is variably displayed from a display area overlapping the operating portion of the operating means.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G5, the specific effect is composed of a specific symbol display that is variably displayed from the display area that overlaps with the operating unit, so that the operating unit and the specific effect are linked. It has the effect of making the player aware of what is happening.

<Characteristic H group> (Pseudo-ream and background level are linked)
A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed as identification information indicating a specific lottery result, the dynamic display execution means Within the dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time of the identification information to be dynamically displayed and the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, the lottery result by the lottery means is described. A plurality of expectation notice display modes in which the production mode is variably set according to the expectation indicating that it is a specific lottery result, and a comprehensive expectation notice display showing the overall expectation in the plurality of expectation notice display modes. The gaming machine H1 is characterized by having at least a notice display control means for displaying an aspect on the display means.

Here, there is a game machine provided with a display screen such as an LCD. When a pachinko machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, is provided with a display screen, a plurality of symbols may be variablely displayed on the display screen based on the establishment of starting conditions. In such a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on the establishment of starting conditions, and when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery, a plurality of symbols to be displayed in a variable manner are combined in a predetermined combination (for example, 777, etc.). In many cases, a game is performed in which a special gaming state (for example, a gaming state called a hit) is generated after the stop (a combination of numbers) (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-072569). .. In such a game machine, the expected degree of hit is notified by displaying a character or the like on the display screen. In the gaming machine illustrated above, when a plurality of notice displays and the like indicating the degree of expectation are displayed, it is difficult to understand the overall degree of expectation. An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game by configuring it to perform an easy-to-understand effect.

According to the game machine H1, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. The identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means on the display means on which the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed. When the identification information is displayed as the identification information indicating a specific lottery result, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The dynamic display time of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is determined by the dynamic display time determining means. Within the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means, a plurality of expected degree notices in which the effect mode is variably set according to the expected degree indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result. The display mode and the total expectation degree notice display mode indicating the total expectation degree in the plurality of expected notice display modes are displayed on at least the display means by the notice display control means. As a result, the overall expectation can be identified by the overall expectation notice display mode, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the game machine H1, the expected degree notice display mode displayed by the notice display control means is displayed to indicate an overall expectation degree equal to or higher than the expectation degree displayed in the total expected degree notice display mode. The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that a variable notice display mode that is variable to the expectation notice display mode is set.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H1, the expectation degree notice display mode is displayed, so that the expectation degree displayed in the total expectation degree notice display mode can be raised. There is also an effect that the player can be interested in the expected degree notice display mode.

In the game machine H1 or H2, when the dynamic display time is determined by the dynamic display time determining means, the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined based on the determined dynamic display time. Based on the dynamic display mode determining means and the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the expected degree notice that determines the type of the expected degree notice display mode displayed by the notice display control means. The gaming machine H3, which has a display mode determining means.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H1 or H2, the type of the expectation notice display mode is determined based on the dynamic display mode, so that the expectation degree associated with the dynamic display mode is used for the game. It is possible to notify the person, and there is an effect that the discomfort given to the player can be reduced because the content of the dynamic display mode and the degree of expectation are not accompanied.

In the game machine H2 or H3, after the identification information is temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode, the pseudo-stop means for executing the effect of starting the dynamic display at least once, and the number of temporary stops executed by the pseudo-stop means. The expected degree notice display control means has the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determining means and the number of times determining means for determining the number of times based on the lottery result by the lottery means. The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that the display means is displayed with the variable notice display mode based on the provisional stop being executed by the means.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2 or the game machine H3, it is possible to add value to the temporary stop, and it is possible to make the player expect the temporary stop to play the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine H3 or H4, in the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the overall expectation notice display mode showing a predetermined expectation is determined by the expectation notice display mode determining means. The gaming machine H5, characterized in that the specific dynamic display mode set so as to be set is set.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3 or the game machine H4, the overall expectation notice display mode is set in relation to the dynamic display mode, so that the overall expectation display mode is related to the dynamic display mode. The degree of expectation can be notified to the player, and there is an effect that the discomfort given to the player can be reduced because the content of the dynamic display mode and the total degree of expectation are not accompanied.

In any of the game machines H1 to H5, the notice display control means displays the total expectation notice display mode within the dynamic display time of 1, and the following identification is made when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the overall expectation notice display mode that continuously shows the same expectation is displayed even in the dynamic display of information.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines H1 to H5, the overall expectation is inherited across a plurality of dynamic displays, so that there is an effect that it is possible to have fun accumulating games. ..

In any of the game machines H3 to H6, as the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, a storage means in which a plurality of dynamic display mode groups composed of a plurality of different dynamic display modes are stored. And a setting means for setting the dynamic display mode group in which the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode.
The overall expectation notice display mode displayed within the dynamic display time of 1 is displayed as a display mode indicating the dynamic display mode group set by the setting means after the dynamic display time. A game machine H7 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of the game machines H3 to H6, it is possible to notify the dynamic display mode group set by the total expectation degree, so that the player can be given various effects. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the game machine H7, the setting means sets the effect mode group corresponding to the type of the displayed total expectation notice display mode when the dynamic display is started by the dynamic display means. A game machine H8 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H7, a production mode group is set according to the total expectation, so that the total expectation and the production mode group can be related to each other, and the player can play. It has the effect of being able to provide easy-to-understand notifications.

In any of the game machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, and H1 to H8, the game machine is a slot machine. Game machine Z1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Game machine Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D12, E1 to E7, F1 to F5, G1 to G6, and H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The gaming machine Z3, which is characterized by being fused. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine equipped with a symbol display device as one of the game machines, and in this pachinko machine, the start condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the start port, and the symbol of the symbol display device starts to fluctuate. If the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation is a combination of predetermined symbols, a big hit will occur, a special gaming state advantageous to the player will occur, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.
Specifically, in the special gaming state, the large winning opening of the variable winning device is opened for a predetermined time (or the time until a predetermined number of prizes are won) and then closed, and the opening / closing operation is performed a predetermined maximum number of times (for example, 16). It is repeated only once). By winning a game ball in the open large prize opening, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-700).
However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game.
This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and aims to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is advantageous to the player based on the entry means capable of entering the game ball and the entry means of the game ball entering the ball. Based on the privilege granting means for granting the privilege, the variable means for changing the entry means between the open position where the game ball can enter and the regulated position for restricting the entry of the game ball, and the establishment of specific conditions. , The specific game execution means for executing the specific game in which the opening operation for changing the variable means from the restricted position to the open position is set a plurality of times, and the type of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means are determined. The specific game type determining means and the specific game determined by the specific game type determining means include storage means in which at least a plurality of the specific games having different patterns of opening operations are stored.
The game machine of the technical idea 2 is the game machine described in the technical idea 1, and when the specific game is executed, the game ball on the regulated position of the variable means is opened by the next and subsequent opening operations. It has a ball entry assisting means that facilitates entry into the ball entry means.
The game machine of the technical idea 3 is the game machine described in the technical idea 2 when the variable means is changed to the open position in the plurality of specific games stored in the storage means. Compared to the first specific game and the first specific game in which a large number of advantageous opening motion patterns, which is one of the patterns of the opening motion, which makes it easier for the ball to enter the ball entering means by the ball entry assisting means, are included. At least a second specific game configured with few advantageous opening operation patterns is set.
The game machine of the technical idea 4 is the game machine described in the technical idea 3, and the first specific game executes the advantageous opening operation pattern a predetermined number of times, and then the above-mentioned advantageous opening operation pattern. The opening operation in which the variable means is changed to the opening position in a period longer than the opening operation is set at least once, and the second specific game is the ball entry assist of the predetermined number of times. It is composed of an opening operation of a disadvantageous opening operation pattern that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry assisting means by means.
<Effect>
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 1, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball entry means in which the game ball can enter. The ball entry means is changed by an open position where the game ball can enter, a regulated position which regulates the entry of the game ball, and a variable means. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the specific game executing means executes the specific game in which the opening operation for changing the variable means from the regulated position to the open position is set a plurality of times. The type of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means is determined by the specific game type determination means. As the specific game determined by the specific game type determining means, at least a plurality of specific games having different patterns of opening operations are stored by the storage means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1, when a specific game is executed, the game ball on the regulated position of the variable means is the ball entry assisting means. This makes it easier for the player to enter the ball entry means in the subsequent opening operation, which has the effect of being more advantageous to the player.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 2, a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous than the specific game are set. This has the effect of giving the game a sharp edge.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 3, a specific game that is advantageous to the player and a specific game that is more disadvantageous than that are set. This has the effect of giving the game a sharp edge.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
22 frame button (operation means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
110 Main control unit (first control means)
113 Audio lamp control device (second control means)
114 Display control device (display control means)
330,340 Spherical accessory (acting means)
S1506, S2002 Part of the validity period setting means
S2003, S2106, S1311 Operation control means

Claims (1)

The first control means for executing the control of the game and
A second control means that executes game control based on a control signal from the first control means, and
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
In a game machine having a display means capable of displaying an effect mode
A display control means capable of displaying the effect mode on the display means based on the operation of the operation means during the valid period.
A valid period setting means capable of setting the valid period and
An operating means capable of operating at least the first state and a second state different from the first state,
It has an operation control means capable of operating the operation means from the first state to the second state.
The display control means
It is configured so that the display means can display the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the valid period.
Outside the valid period, the plurality of suggested modes can be dynamically displayed at different positions, and the plurality of suggested modes can be displayed at overlapping positions during the valid period.
The operation control means operates the operating means from the second state to the first state before a predetermined period from the start of the valid period, and based on the start of the valid period, the first state to the second state. It is configured to be able to operate
When the operating means is operated from the second state to the first state, the display control means dynamically displays the plurality of suggested modes so as to approach each other, and the operating means starts from the first state. A gaming machine characterized in that when it is operated in the second state, the display means can display the plurality of suggested modes in a manner overlapping with each other .

Images